SERVICE

Chillers and heat pumps

Application FLBBOMMTTF
Issue 09/10 Replaces 06/09
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 CONTENTS ................................................................................................... 5
1.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL ................................................................................................................................ 5
1.2 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................. 5

2 SYSTEM HARDWARE ................................................................................... 6

2.1 HARDWARE COMPONENTS ................................................................................................................................ 6
2.1.1 The “Small”, “Medium” and “Large” cards ............................................................................................... 7
2.2 CONNECTION TO CARDS .................................................................................................................................... 8
2.2.1 Power supply ........................................................................................................................................... 8
2.2.2 Digital inputs ............................................................................................................................................ 9
2.2.3 Digital outputs........................................................................................................................................ 10
2.2.4 Analog inputs......................................................................................................................................... 11
2.2.5 Analog outputs ...................................................................................................................................... 12
2.2.6 User interface ........................................................................................................................................ 13
2.2.7 Serial cards ........................................................................................................................................... 14
2.2.8 Programming keys ................................................................................................................................ 18
2.3 CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE CARDS .................................................................................................. 22
2.3.1 Local networks in pLAN ........................................................................................................................ 22
2.3.2 Addressing the elements of the pLAN network ..................................................................................... 24
2.3.3 Local networks in tLAN ......................................................................................................................... 25

3 PCO3 PROGRAMMING ................................................................................. 26

3.1 OPERATING MODE .......................................................................................................................................... 26
3.1.1 Programming with a key ........................................................................................................................ 26
3.2 PROGRAMMING WITH A PERSONAL COMPUTER ................................................................................................. 27
3.3 ADDRESSING OF THE COMPONENTS OF THE PLAN NETWORK............................................................................ 28
3.3.1 Address of the cards ............................................................................................................................. 28
3.3.2 Address of the terminals ....................................................................................................................... 28
3.3.3 Addressing for a single network unit ..................................................................................................... 30
3.3.4 Addressing several units in a network with a shared terminal .............................................................. 30
3.3.5 Network status ...................................................................................................................................... 30
3.3.6 Verification of the network function ....................................................................................................... 31

4 HARDWARE VERIFICATION ....................................................................... 32

4.1 SEARCH FOR NETWORK BREAKDOWNS ............................................................................................................ 32
4.2 ANALOG INPUT VERIFICATION .......................................................................................................................... 34
4.2.1 Lice active probes ................................................................................................................................. 34
4.2.2 Live active probe ................................................................................................................................... 34
4.2.3 Passive “NTC” probe and PT1000 ........................................................................................................ 35

5 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROGRAMME FUNCTION ...................................... 36

5.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 36
5.2 FUNDAMENTAL FUNCTIONS .............................................................................................................................. 36
5.2.1 Unit in stand-by mode ........................................................................................................................... 36
5.2.2 Unit enabling ......................................................................................................................................... 36
5.2.3 Pump management ............................................................................................................................... 36
5.2.4 Compressor launch ............................................................................................................................... 37
5.2.5 Functioning in chiller mode.................................................................................................................... 37
5.2.6 Heat pump function ............................................................................................................................... 37
5.2.7 Passing from chiller mode to heat pump and vice versa ....................................................................... 38
5.3 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................................... 38
5.3.1 Heating the carter oil ............................................................................................................................. 38
5.3.2 Evaporator anti-freeze ........................................................................................................................... 39
5.3.3 Anti-freeze resistance............................................................................................................................ 39
5.3.4 Function of the compressors ................................................................................................................. 39
5.3.5 The alarm of the compressors .............................................................................................................. 40

3
 5.3.6 Compressor management ..................................................................................................................... 41
5.3.7 Definition of degrees of power............................................................................................................... 41
5.3.8 Condensation control ............................................................................................................................ 41
5.3.9 Condensation control for units with free cooling ................................................................................... 42
5.3.10 Evaporation control ............................................................................................................................... 43
5.3.11 Defrosting .............................................................................................................................................. 44
5.4 ACCESSORY FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................. 46
5.4.1 Digital input “auxiliary voltage failure”.................................................................................................... 46
5.4.2 Free cooling........................................................................................................................................... 46
5.4.3 Total heat recovery ............................................................................................................................... 48
5.4.4 Desuperheater ...................................................................................................................................... 50
5.4.5 Continuous set point variation ............................................................................................................... 50
5.4.6 Double set point .................................................................................................................................... 50
5.4.7 Functioning with output water temperature ........................................................................................... 50
5.4.8 Forced capacity reduction ..................................................................................................................... 53
5.4.9 Forced switching of the compressors and oil distribution...................................................................... 53
5.4.10 Factory programming back-up function................................................................................................. 54
5.4.11 Limited automatic alarm reset ............................................................................................................... 54
5.4.12 Low Charge Operation .......................................................................................................................... 54
5.4.13 Alarm batching ...................................................................................................................................... 54
5.4.14 Management of the alarm sending via GSM modem ............................................................................ 55
5.4.15 Cyclic and event recording of parameters of functioning of the unit; .................................................... 56
5.4.16 Control of the yield and unit efficiency................................................................................................... 56
5.4.17 Compensation of the set point............................................................................................................... 56
5.4.18 Heating pump stop ................................................................................................................................ 57
5.4.19 Putting the cooling plant in operation .................................................................................................... 57
5.4.20 Winter functioning limit and integrative heating ..................................................................................... 58
5.4.21 Limited manual cancellation of the alarms ............................................................................................ 58
5.4.22 Second parameter settings for condensation control ............................................................................ 58

6 I/O ............................................................................................................... 60
6.1.1 General information ............................................................................................................................... 60
6.2 LIST OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ......................................................................................................................... 61
6.2.1 Configuration “1A” ................................................................................................................................. 61
6.2.2 Configuration “2A” ................................................................................................................................. 64
6.2.3 Configuration “2B” ................................................................................................................................. 68
6.2.4 Configuration “3A” ................................................................................................................................. 73
6.2.5 Configuration “3B” ................................................................................................................................. 78
6.2.6 Configuration “4A” ................................................................................................................................. 83
6.2.7 Configuration “4B” ................................................................................................................................. 89

7 TEMPLATES ............................................................................................... 95
7.1 GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................................................................................................. 95
7.2 TREE DIAGRAM OF THE TEMPLATES ................................................................................................................. 95
7.2.1 Service Templates ................................................................................................................................ 96
7.2.2 Maintenance Templates ...................................................................................................................... 104
7.2.3 GSM Templates .................................................................................................................................. 113
7.2.4 Clock Templates ................................................................................................................................. 114
7.2.5 Menu Templates.................................................................................................................................. 115
7.2.6 Set Templates ..................................................................................................................................... 117
7.2.7 I/O Templates ...................................................................................................................................... 118
7.2.8 Alarms ................................................................................................................................................. 122
7.2.9 History Branch ..................................................................................................................................... 123
7.3 ALARM TEMPLATES ....................................................................................................................................... 126
7.3.1 List of alarm templates ........................................................................................................................ 126

4
1 CONTENTS

1.1 Purpose of the manual

3
The purpose of this manual is to provide all the information necessary to use the pCO controller.
The information concerns the control connection, the various functions performed by the software customized by
Blue Box and various solutions acquired through experience over time.
This version of the manual is an update of version 2.5 of the software.
This manual does not contain information on unit installation, checks and controls at first start-up.
We presume that the unit was installed correctly and the inspections and checks prior to startup and routine
maintenance were carried out according to the information contained in the user manual of Blue Box units.
We thank you in advance for your willingness to cooperate with us by reporting any errors, parts that require further
explanation or operating modes omitted.

1.2 Controller functions

3
The electronic pCO microprocessor controller with the FLBBOMMTTF program was designed to control chiller and
heat pump units.
The program provides the opportunity to control, through an appropriate configuration, air-cooled and water-cooled
units with tube bundle and plate-type heat exchangers, with separate and parallel cooling circuits.
Management of the refrigeration units translates into controlling the safe operation of the components during the
various stages of operation.
3
The range of pCO electronic microprocessor control comprises cards of various sizes that may be fully exploited by
using the one having the required number of inputs and outputs for each application.
Moreover, if one of the cards does not have enough inputs and outputs, several cards can be interconnected to form
a local pLAN network.

5
2 SYSTEM HARDWARE
This chapter describes the main components of the system, all the accessories, their connection and functions.
The software described below only uses the power of the system required for its operation, although, for the sake of
completeness, the entire system is described in this part of the manual.

2.1 Hardware components

3
The range of pCO controllers contains cards of three sizes with a different number of inputs and outputs. These
are: ―Small‖; ―Medium‖ and ―Large‖.
All cards are installed in a closed plastic container and provided with removable terminal blocks.
The system for controlling the chillers and heat pumps, in this version of software, provides the use of all three types
of card.
The cards are designed to use a 4x20 backlit LCD display projected for panel mounting.
The interconnection of two or more components constitutes a network (pLAN).
In addition to the card and terminal block, which are the basic parts, the system includes a number of accessories
such as the programming key, the drivers for controlling the electronic valves and the various cards for serial
connections.
The use of "T" diverters is useful, if not necessary, in some cases, to ease the connection between the cards and
display.

6
 2.1.1 The ―Small‖, ―Medium‖ and ―Large‖ cards
What distinguishes the card sizes is the number of inputs and outputs available.
The effectiveness and use of the cards are the same except for the ability to handle an extra card, which is possible
only with "Large" cards.

Card type
Small Medium Large
inlets/outlets

Universal analog inputs 3 6 6

Passive analog inputs 2 2 4
Digital Input 8 14 18
Analog output 4 4 6
Digital outputs 4 13 18

Any of these cards may be used as an additional card.

When using a card as an additional one, the inputs and outputs are controlled via the "Large" card.
In the figure below is shown a "Large‖ card. This will help you locate the various parts present and summarize their
function in the relative legend.

1) Terminal blocks for the power supply 24 Vac/Vdc [G (+), G0 (-)]

2) Yellow LED that indicates the presence of the power supply and 3 LED flashlights for the local pLAN network
3) Additional power supply for the terminal and ratiometric probes 0/5V
4) Universal analog inputs: NTC, 0-1V, 0-5V, 0-10V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
5) Passive analog inputs NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF
6) Analog outputs 0-10V
7) Digital inputs at 24 Vac/Vdc
8) Digital inputs at 230 Vac or 24 Vac/Vdc
9) Connector for the synoptic terminal
10) Connector for the terminals of the pCO series and for the application program ―Download‖
11) Relay digital outputs
12) Connector for the connection to the expansion card
13) Connection for the pLAN local network
14) Slot for inserting the supervision and remote control serial card
15) Slot for inserting the serial field bus communication card
16) Slot for inserting the service serial card

7
2.2 Connection to cards
The figure on the previous page shows the connection points of a ―Large" card.
In this section we will present in detail how you should carry out the connection of the various inputs and outputs to
the other cards or the terminal via the pLAN network and how to install the accessory cards.

2.2.1 Power supply

Power supplied must be 24V, either AC or DC voltage.
If you power the unit from a DC source, you must observe the polarity which provides the positive pole to terminal
"G" and the negative pole to "Go".
The Blue Box applications have AC power supply and the "Go" terminal block is grounded to ensure a fixed
reference potential.
When using multiple cards in local network, all "Go" terminals must be connected to the same potential and to
ground.
The figure shows an example of connecting multiple cards to a local network, all powered by a single transformer.

AWG 20/22 AWG 20/22 AWG 20/22

R R G R R G R R G
X- X+ N X- X+ N X- X+ N
/T /T D /T /T D /T /T D
X+ X- X+ X- X+ X-

G G G G G G
0 0 0

If the local network is composed of cards powered by multiple transformers, an eventuality that occurs when multiple
units are interconnected as provided in the boss runner operation, the "Go" terminal must not be grounded.
In this case, it is recommended not to connect the "G" terminal to the ground to prevent the residual current from
circulating on the pLAN, due to the plant different grounding resistances.

AWG 20/22 AWG 20/22 AWG 20/22

R R G R R G R R G
X- X+ N X- X+ N X- X+ N
/T /T D /T /T D /T /T D
X+ X- X+ X- X+ X-

G G G G G G
0 0 0

The figure shows the connection of cards with the "Go" terminal grounded.

8
 2.2.2 Digital inputs
The opto-isolated digital inputs enable the control to receive information through the dry contacts.
Like the control power supply, all digital inputs can be supplied at 24V DC or AC.
Some inputs can be supplied with 24V or 230V; these inputs have a common terminal, one for 24V and another for
230V, so you must pay particular attention and carry out the connections properly, to avoid connecting wires under
230 voltage to terminals designed for 24V.

IDC13
ID13H

ID14H
ID10
ID11
ID12
IDC9

ID13

ID14
IDC1
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
ID5
ID6
ID7
ID8

ID9
G
G0

24Vac

IDC15

IDC17
ID15H

ID16H

BC10
ID15

ID16

ID17
ID18
BC9
B10
Serial Card

Y5
Y6

B9

G
G0

Digital input 24V AC connection

Digital input 230V AC connection

9
2.2.3 Digital outputs

Digital outputs are the dry relay contacts, normally open or in exchange, driven by the micro-processor.
The terminal connectors of the outputs are grouped and each group has a common pole, consequently the entire
group must power charges at the same voltage, while diverse groups can power feed circuits with different voltage.
The contacts are protected with 250Vac varistors. The common terminal connectors can be crossed by 8A resistive
or 2A inductive current (cos  0.4).
N

Vac
110/230-24
L

N
Vac
110/230-24

10
 2.2.4 Analog inputs
The analog inputs enable the control to read a signal that varies within two limit values.
Connection type:

Passive analog inputs:

- NTC temperature probe (-50/100°C; 10kOhm at 25°C)
- PT1000 temperature probe (-100/200°C; 1000 Ohm at 0°C)
- dry contact
Universal inputs:
- NTC temperature probe (-50/100°C; 10kOhm at 25°C)
- live probe /1Vdc, 0/5Vdc, 0/10Vdc
- live probe /20mA, 4/20mA

21Vdc from the ―+Vdc‖ terminal connector are available for powering the active probes, with a maximum suppliable
current of is 200mA.

G
G0 J1
J9

+Vterm
GND J24 J10
Probe 1 (0/5V) +5 V
REF
Rx-/Tx-
Rx+/Tx+
B1
GND
B2
Probe 2 (4/20 mA)
B3 J2
field card

service card
M
GND
Probe 3 (0/1 dc or 4/20 mA) OU T
+VDC
+V

B4
Probe 4 NTC
BC4
J3
B5
Probe 5 PT1000
BC5

C1
NO1
VG NO2
VG0 NO3
Y1 C1
serial card

Y2 C4
Y3 NO4
Y4 NO5
ID1 NO6
ID2 C4
ID3
C7
ID4
NO7
ID5
C7
ID6
ID7 NO8
ID8 C8
IDC1 NC8

Reported in the figure are some examples of connection where:

Probe 1 Ratiometric active probe, with 0/5V signal;
Probe 2 Active probe in current with two wires 4/20 mA;
Probe 3 Active probe live or under current with three wires 0/1 Vdc or 4/20 mA;
Probe 4 NTC passive probe
Probe 5 PT1000 probe

Inputs B1, B2 and B3 which feature on all card sizes, and B6, B7 and B8 that feature only on the medium and Large
versions, are universal inputs to which active and passive probes can be connected.
Inputs B4 and B5 that feature on all the cards, inputs B9 and B10 featured on the Large versions only, can only be
connected to the passive probes.

11
 2.2.5 Analog outputs
The analog outputs must be powered at 24Vac /Vdc, through the terminal connectors VG and VG0.
The outputs signal is type 0/10 Vdc, and each output can power a minimal impedance of a kOhm.
The outputs are all opto-isolated.
The information reported above is shown in the figure.

B ID ID ID
B B1
Y5 Y6 B9 C1 17 18 C1
C9 0 7
0
Serial Card

G 0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
V G
V

Vout
Vout
Vout
Vout
Vout
24 Vac/Vdc
Vout
0V

12
 2.2.6 User interface
The user interface is arranged for panel mounting; the LCD display is backlit and composed of four rows and 20
columns.

The figure shows an image of the ―PGD0‖.

PGD0 User Interface

The functions of the six keys are reported below:

This key, hereinafter called ―upwards arrow‖ allows the user to scroll the templates of the
various branches and modify by increasing the values in the various fields.

This key, hereinafter called ―downwards arrow‖ allows the user to scroll the templates of the
various branches and modify by decreasing the values of the various fields.

This key, hereinafter called ―enter key‖ confirms the selection made both for accessing the
various branches and modifying parameters.

This key, hereinafter called ―alarm key‖, allows the alarm buzzer to be silenced, the active
alarms to be viewed and cancelled, if necessary.

This key, hereinafter called ―prog key‖, grants access to the templates loop of the various
branches.

This key allows the user to return to the upper templates level

13
 2.2.7 Serial cards
3
The pCO control allows connection with two serials, one for monitoring and tele-management, the other for field
devices; cards for different standards of communication are available for both outputs.
The information reported in this chapter is probably not exhaustive; at some stage in the future other cards will be
available for communication with other protocols.

In regards to connection to monitoring and tele-assistance systems, the serial card with PCOS004850 code can be
used, that enables communication by using either the protocol ―Carel‖ or ―Modbus-Jbus‖ RTU.

Serial card PCOS0004850

®
The control can be connected to a LonWorks network that uses the protocol ―Echelon‖ in the FTT10 version at 78
kbs (TP/FT-10), installing the serial card PCO10000F0. Transmission speed must be set at a maximum of 4800

Serial card PCO10000F0

Further possibilities in the serial communication are thanks to the use of the protocols of the HVAC world based on
the standard physical Ethernet by means of the PCO1000WB0 card.
This serial card enables connection to the local LAN or Internet networks, SNMP V1/2/3, BACnetTM EthernetTM, IP,
FTP and HTTP.

Serial card PCO1000WB0

The PCO1000BB0 card is required in order to use the BACnet protocol in the RS485 version.

Serial card PCO1000BB0

In the case in which the serial protocol requested is CANbus, it is necessary to use the PCOS00HBB0 card
14
 Serial card PCOS00HBBO

For connection to monitoring systems in England, the use of the TREND protocol is often required; in order to be
able to communicate with this protocol it is necessary to install the PCO100CLP0 card.

Serial card PCO100CLP0

Finally, the RS232 PCO100MDM0 card can be installed in the same output, to communicate with a GSM modem.

Serial card PCO100MDM0

In relation to the output dedicated to the field bus, the PCOS00HBF0 card is available which uses the CANbus
protocol to communicate with Carel hydronic systems.

15
 Serial card PCOS00HBFO

Alternatively, on the same output, the PCO100TLN0 card can be installed which uses the tLAN Carel protocol to
communicate with other devices such as the EVD*400 drivers, for example, for electronic expansion valves.

Serial card PCO100TLN0

®
With devices that use the Carel standard protocol or the Modbus RTU, the RS485 PCO100FD10 serial card can be
installed.

Serial card PCO100FD10

®
For the BELLIMO servos, which use the MP-BUS protocol, the PCO100MPB0 card can be installed.
Finally, if the same output must be used for communicating with a modem, it the PCOS00FD20 serial card can be
installed.

Serial card PCOS00FD20

The cards must be inserted into their designated housing, which features a comb connector.

16
For their installation, it is necessary to remove the door identified on the control featuring the writing ―serial card‖, for
the serial output dedicated to monitoring of tele-management or, with the writing ―field card‖, for the output dedicated
to the command of field devices.
In installing the serial card, it is necessary to block it between the two plastic supports welded to the container of the
3
pCO control.
Once the card is inserted, the door is put back in place by matching the exposed connector of the card with the pre-
cut hole of the actual door.
More detailed instructions are reported in the documentation provided with each card.

17
 2.2.8 Programming keys

The Carel code of the programming key is PCOS00AKY0, hereinafter called ―Smart Key‖.
3
The Smart Key allows software configurations to be transferred from computer to pCO controls and vice versa.
3
Connection to the pCO takes place directly by means of telephonic connector, while it is necessary to use the USB
PCOS00AKC0 connector for connection with the computer.
3
Powering the Smart Key takes place from the USB port of the computer or directly from the pCO card, therefore a
power supply is not required.

Programming key

The USB convertor is necessary for connecting the Smart Key with the computer.

USB convertor for keys

For operating of the convertor, in addition to the presence of the USB port, VCP drivers are required in the computer,
therefore the same used with the USB-485 convertor, if the USB-485 convertor is already in use, no other drivers
need by installed, otherwise resort to UTP.
On connecting the convertor to a USB port of the personal computer for the first time, the system detects the
presence of a new hardware and requests the installation of the VCP drivers for managing the serial port. At this
point the directory path featuring the drivers must be selected.
If the drivers are correctly installed, the system automatically detects a new COM port that will normally be COM3.
In the case of multiple adaptors connected to the same computer, the port assigned to the system must be checked.
In order to carry out all the Smart key reading, writing and configuration operations, a specific ―pco_manager‖
programme must be used.

ATTENTION
3
Do not connect the PCOS00AKC0 adaptor to the pCO telephone connector as this could cause irreversible damage
3 3
to the computer and the pCO . Use the specific CVSTDUTLF0 convertor for programming the pCO with the
computer.

In the following figure the connection of the programming key is connected to the computer using the specific
convertor and the USB serial port.

18
 telephone cable USB cable

Connection of the key to the computer

The key, as we have seen, can be programmed with a computer, using the ―pco_manager‖ programme.
The functions allowed with the use of the key can be set with the ―pco_manager‖ programme.
The functions that can be set in the key are summarised in table.

Type Function Key Mode

Software update
3
from key to pCO
B Disabled
(bios, applicative,
parameters, …)
Software copy from Switches the
3 3
pCO to pCO key from
C
(bios, applicative writing to
parameters, …) reading mode
D Historical readings Disabled
Historical data
3
reading and pCO
E software Disabled
(bios, applicative,
parameters, …)
µChiller3 historical
F Disabled
data reading

When the key is connected to a computer, the arrow symbols take on different meanings as reported in a table.


Flashing Awaiting connection with the PC

During the connection with the PC they indicate that the

Alternating
data transfer is in progress

3
Once the desired function is set and correctly programmed, the key can be used with the pCO control.

The power supply must be removed from card before connecting the key to the telephonic connector in place of the
terminal.
When it is switched on again all of the symbols will light up for an instant and the buzzer will sound. It is therefore
necessary to wait several seconds before the key is operative.
3
This waiting period is indicated by the flashing symbol. At the end, the pCO card goes into programming mode
and the start key, now steadily lit, can be pressed to begin transferring data.

19
ATTENTION

If the key is type “B” or “C” (in written mode) pressing the start key causes the immediate cancellation of the software
3
loaded in the pCO .
3
When the key is connected to a pCO , the keys and the symbols have the functions reported in the table

 3
Flashing: the key is in connection phase with the pCO card, during this
phase, which can last several seconds, the start key is disabled.

3
Start Flashing: the key has detected the pCO and is verifying the access permits.

On and steady: the pressure of the start key begins the writing of the
start + 3
software in the pCO .
3
On and steady: the pressure of the start key begins the reading of the pCO
start +
software.
On and steady: pressing the start key begins the historical reading of the
start + 3
pCO .
Steady on: for the ―C‖ type key, when pressed for 1 second, it performs the
Mode
commutation from reading and writing.

In the case of type ―C‖ keys, by pressing the ―mode‖ key for 1 second, the commutation from reading to writing is
3 3
performed, and vice versa. The (written to pCO ) and (reading of the pCO ) symbols perform the selected
status.
If the key is not type ―C‖, the ―mode‖ key is disabled and switched off.
The ―start‖ key starts the reading and writing action which will be indicated by the flashing of the relative symbol (
or ), with frequency proportional to the state of progress.
When the operation is complete, the buzzer sounds intermittently for 20 seconds. Successive pressing of the ―start‖
key makes the buzzer sound again without carrying out the command again, to repeat the operation the key must be
disconnected.
In the case of error the symbol is lit in combination with other LEDs. The following table enables the causes of the
problem to be traced.

Communication
error, no
response from
3
+ the pCO or,
Flashing
+ incompatible
firmware
version of the
key.

+ Password or
Lit
mode key type error.

+ Incompatible
Flashing
mode key type

+ The writing
Flashing and
start + command has
intermittent
+ not occurred
buzzer
buzzer correctly.

20
 The reading
+
Flashing and command has
start +
intermittent not been
+
buzzer performed
buzzer correctly.
The history
+ reading
Flashing and
start + command has
intermittent
+ buzzer not been
buzzer performed
correctly.
The key is
missing one or
+ On
more
necessary files.
Incompatibility
between the
+ On and start
bios file and
+ start flashing 3
the pCO
hardware.
Incompatibility
+ between the
On and mode
+ application file
flashing 3
mode and the pCO
hardware.
Incompatibility
between
+ On and configuration of
+ flashing the history and
3
the pCO
hardware.
Insufficient
space for the
+ On
reading of the
history.
No historical
+
On data in the
+ 3
pCO card.
The key type is
On not
programmed

ATTENTION

The key must not be removed while a writing operation to it is in progress, as the file in transfer phase is lost and the
corresponding space is not recovered. To obtain the original capacity again all the files must be cancelled.
In the case of a type “C” key it is sufficient to perform a new reading.

21
2.3 CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE CARDS
In addition to the connections made on the cards, it is possible to connect different cards and one or more user
interfaces.
The connection of multiple elements such as cards and user interfaces forms a local network.
The local network that connects the various components of the pCO family is called pLAN (pCO Local Area
Network).
In addition to the various serial cards, some cards for connection of the field bus are available with the controls of the
3
pCO family.
A field bus developed by Carel uses a driver with transistor; the connections between the various components that
use this field bus form a further local network called tLAN.
The two networks are differentiated for their physical characteristics which enable a different type of use.

2.3.1 Local networks in pLAN

The local pLAN network enables the various elements that constitute the system to communicate between each
other.
Each element can be identified within the network by means of its serial address, which is assigned with a software
procedure.
The connections of the pLAN network between the various cards are made with shielded and interwoven bipolar
2
cable with a minimum of 0.5 mm diameter.
The connection must be made by putting the ―RxTx+‖ and ―RxTx-― terminal connectors parallel to the devices to
connect online, and the shielding of the cable must be connected to the respective ―GND‖ terminal connectors.
3
If the distance between the terminal and the pCO card that power it is less than 50 m., the powering of the terminal
can be done directly by means of the 6-way telephone cable.

max 50 m

R R G
X- X+ N
/T /T D
X+ X-

In order to connect the terminal at a distance of more than 50 m and within 200 m, it is necessary to use 3 couples of
2
interwoven wires contained in a shielding with a minimum 0.5 mm diameter and ―T‖ deviators as shown in the
figure.

22
 200 m

The pLAN network communicates with the standard serial RS485 with a baud-rate of 65.2 kbit/s, uses the Carel-
owned Multimaster protocol and can have a maximum extension of 500 m using the ―T‖ derivators for the remotings.

―T‖ deviator

In relation to cable connections, these must be done according to the table below.
2
Cable AWG24 (with power supply) diam. 0.5 mm
Terminal Function Cable connection
connector
0 Earth Screen
1 + VRL (30 Vdc) First twisted pair A
2 GND Second twisted pair A
3 Rx/Tx- Third twisted pair A
4 Rx/Tx+ Third twisted pair B
5 GND Second twisted pair B
6 + VRL (30 Vdc) First twisted pair B

The code TCONN6J000 ―T‖ deviators are provided with three 6-way telephonic connectors (terminals A, B and C)
and a terminal board with screw terminal connectors (SC terminal).
By means of the J14 and J15 jumpers it is possible to insulate the power voltage between the SC connectors B C
and A, to allow the single passage of the communication signals.

23
The insulation occurs when the jumpers are placed on combs 2 and 3 while, with the jumpers on combs 1 and 2 it
takes place in addition to the passage of the communication signals of the power voltage also.
The metallic connector support must always be earthed.

2.3.2 Addressing the elements of the pLAN network

Each active element of the network is identified by means of its serial address.
The I/O cards and the interface terminals are active elements.
The address is assigned by means of a software setting.
The addresses for each element are set in a development phase of the software, therefore, at the time of the
construction of the network it is necessary to give each element the address provided.

The next chapter reports how to set the addresses to the various elements of the pLAN network.

Reported in the table are the addresses provided for the elements of a network for the management of a unit
composed of 4 refrigeration circuits, a local terminal and a possible remote terminal.

No. of Master Card Slave Card Expansion Terminal

circuits Ind. Ind.
Model Model Ind. Local Shared
1 Medium / /
2 Large / /
1 17 21 32
3 Large Medium
2
4 Large Large

Addresses ―1‖ and ―2‖ are necessary for the software to identify the Master card and the Slave card, the expansion
card has address "17", the local terminal "21" and the remote "32".
The addressing of the terminals is conventional to remain uniform with the other software.
For the moment the function in network of multiple units is not provided, such as the software for chillers or for heat
pump ―FLBB0MP20A‖ in the ―Boss/Runner‖ function.

24
 2.3.3 Local networks in tLAN
3
The bus fields on a serial card are available in the controls of the pCO family, in addition to the pLAN network.
The bus is defined as field due to the limited distance that must be respected between the various connected
components.
3
A field bus developed by Carel is called tLAN and allows 5 further devices to be connected to each pCO card.
Drivers for the electronic expansion valve command and further cards for increasing inputs and outputs available to
the system are the devices currently available.
The tLAN network is completely independent from the pLAN.
Similarly to the pLAN, all the network connected devices are identified by means of their address, which are
assigned via serial mode with appropriate software.
Also in this network, the addresses for each device in tLAN are fixed in the development phase of the software
therefore, at the moment of constructing the network that provided must be correctly assigned to each element.
2
The connection in tLAN is performed by means of shielded bipolar cable with a 0.5 mm diameter the maximum
3
possible distance between the pCO card and the farthest component in the network is 30m.
The tLAN quickly communicates the transmission of a value to insert in the software with 4800 baud-rate (bit/s) for
the setting of the serial address.
The connection takes place by means of screw terminal connectors.
In regards to the software for chillers and Blue Box heat pump, the serial in tLAN is used for communicating between
the control cards of the units and the drivers for the electronic expansion valves.
The addresses to assign in tLAN to the various drivers are reported in the following table.

Refrigeration Driver Address EDV4

circuit
CH only valve HP only valve Bidirectional valve

1 1 2 1

2 3 4 3

3 1 2 1

4 3 4 3

The addresses to set in the drivers for the valves in circuits 3 and 4 are the same as circuits 1 and 2 in that they are
3
managed by 2 different pCO cards.
The addressing of the components of the tLAN network takes place by means of specific software, the use of which
is reported in the relative documentation.
An EVD4 driver is reported in the image.

25
3 PCO3 PROGRAMMING
3
Programming the pCO refers to the insertion o the software of the applicative for the management of the
refrigeration unit.
3
For the functioning of the microprocessor, in the pCO cards flash memory, the bios.bin and boot.bin files must be
present.
The cards can be programmed both with the key and with the computer by means of a dedicated ―WinLoad‖
software present in the ―pco_manager‖.
Independently from the method used, cards are programmed via serial by means of the same 6-way telephone
connector used for connection of the terminal.
3
To connect the pCO cards to the serial port of the computer a RS232/485 opto-isolated convertor is required,
powered with a 12Vac ―Carel code for the convertor kit PC485KIT*0‖ transformer or the convertor for a USB port
(Carel code for convertor CVSTDUTLF0).
However, in order to programme the cards, it is necessary to do so for all those used for controlling the unit, whether
they function by Master or by Slave and if necessary, if provided, by expansion.

3.1 Operating mode

Depending on the mode with which the programming takes place for a successful outcome, the operations must be
performed correctly.

3.1.1 Programming with a key

3
The use of the programming key is the fastest and safest system for downloading an applicative onto a pCO card.
3
To use the key with the pCO :
 Disconnect from the mains
 Connect the key with a terminal telephone connector.
 When switched on again, all of the LED lights of the key symbols light up for an instant and the buzzer
sounds.
 Wait several seconds before using the key.
3
 Wait for the ― " symbol to flash. When finished the pCO enters programming mode and the start key,
now steadily lit, can be pressed to start transferring data.
 The progress of the transfer is indicated by the flashing of the ― ‖ symbol.
 When the operation is completed, the buzzer sounds intermittently for 20 seconds. While subsequently
pressing the ―start‖ key makes the buzzer sound again, the command is not repeated. The key must be
disconnected to repeat the operation.

ATTENTION

With the type “B” or “C” programmed key (written mode), pressing the “start” button causes the immediate
3
cancellation of the software loaded in the pCO .

26
3.2 Programming with a personal computer
3
To programme a pCO card with a personal computer the ―WinLoad32‖ in the ―pco_manager‖ must be installed.
3
A RS485/RS232 serial convertor is required in order to connect the pCO card to programme to the personal
computer.
3
Whatever the type of serial output used and relative convertor, its connection with the pCO card is performed by
means of a cable equipped with 6-way telephone connectors.
3
The connector to use on the pCO card is that identified with the initial J10, the same used for connecting the
terminal.
3
 After having launched WinLoad32, set the same address as set on the connected card on the ―pCO
address‖ window, placed at the bottom right of the screen.
3
 Power the pCO card electrically and wait for the writing "ON LINE" to appear, in the bottom left on the
WinLoad32 programme status bar, in place of ―OFF LINE‖.
 If the connection is not performed on the correct serial output, next to the writing ―OFF LINE‖ the message
―SERIAL PORT ERROR‖ appears. To restore the connection the correct port must be selected on the
―COMM‖ window, found in the bottom right.
 Once the connection has been established, by selecting the ―Upload‖ command on the drop down menu,
further choices appear ―application‖, ―bios‖, ―boot‖, ―Public Variables‖ and ―Log Project‖.
The first three commands are sufficient for downloading the programme.
In the case in which the boot and bios files must be downloaded in the card, in addition to the files of the application,
it is necessary to proceed as follows:
 Select the path in the ―boot‖ window where the boot.bin file is present
 Insert the password ―1234‖ and confirm by pressing ―enter‖
 Select the boot.bin file and click ―Upload‖
 At the end of the copying the writing ―OFF LINE‖ will appear on the status bar in the bottom left.
 Select the path in the ―bios‖ window that features the bios.bin file.
 Select the bios.bin file and click on ―Upload

To copy the application:

 In the ―application‖ window, select the path containing the files with the ―iup‖ extension and ―flash.bin‖
extensions to be copied
 Select the flag under the windows that contain the files to copy to render them active
 Select all the files with an ―iup‖ extension in the left window relative to the various languages that compose
the application and the ―flash.bin‖ file in the central window
 Place the flag on the right hand window to select a configuration file
 Launch the copying by selecting the ―Upload‖ command.
 Complete the programming,
 Remove the power from the pCO3 card and disconnect it from the convertor, and connect it correctly to the
network.

27
3.3 Addressing of the components of the pLAN network
All of the components (cards and terminals) are distinguished inside the pLAN network through their address.
As previously seen, a particular address must be assigned to each component.
In addition to setting the address of the components of the network it is necessary to address the terminals to the
reading of the cards.
The terminals must read the single Master cards, the only ones that manage the functioning parameters.
The Slave cards are used by the Masters to use the inputs and outputs.
A Master card can be read to the maximum by three terminals, only one of which can be configured as shared, the
other two must be configured as private.
A Master card and a terminal represent the indispensable components for the unit functioning, and constitute the
starting elements of a network.
The network presence or absence of a Slave card depends on the functions enabled in the configuration phase on
the Master card of the unit.
In any case the address to assign to the terminals, to the Master and Slave cards must be respected, as reported in
the table of the paragraph ―Addressing of the network element‖.

3.3.1 Address of the cards

All the cards for controlling the unit must have an address in order to be identified within the network, whether this
involves cards that function as Master, Slave and if they are provided as expansions.
3
The addressing of the pCO cards occurs by means of a software procedure using a terminal.
The terminal used for addressing the cards must have its own address at ―0‖. It is necessary, therefore, to perform
this operation to grant access by the terminal to the procedure of addressing of the cards.
Electrically power the card to address with connection to a terminal, whose address must be set at "0‖. The
operation must be performed by keeping the following keys pressed down:

After several seconds the default Carel software present in the card to address, launches the addressing procedure
and the template reported below appears.

PLAN address: --
UP: increase
DOWN: decrease
ENTER: save & exit

The address of the card must be set in the ―--‖ field.

Following the instructions reported in the template, i.e. by increasing the value with the ―upwards arrow‖ key,
reducing it with the ―downwards arrow‖ and confirming with ―enter‖, the card address is modified according to the
function assigned in the control of the unit with the values reported in the ―Addressing of the elements of the
network‖ paragraph.

3.3.2 Address of the terminals

The addressing of the terminals are used for their recognition in the network; Through this procedure, to each
terminal it is defined if it must read a card (private terminal) only, which card to read, or if it can read several cards
(shared terminal).
To enable the configuration of a terminal the keys shown in the figure below must be pressed simultaneously for five
seconds.

28
After 5 seconds the template appears

Display address
Setting. . . . . :nn

I/O Board address:xx

The ―nn‖ value on the second row represents the current address of the terminal;
The ―xx‖ value on the fourth row represents the address of the card read by the terminal; only if the ―nn‖ address of
the terminal is set at ―00‖ this line will not appear.
By pressing the ―enter‖ key, the cursor is moved onto the first ―nn‖ field. At this point, the set value can be modified
with the arrow keys, increasing it with the upwards arrow and decreasing it with the downwards arrow.
If the value and, therefore, the address of the terminal are modified, after having pressed the ―enter‖ key, the
following confirmation templates will appear. After several instances, the display will return to the main menu
template.

Display address
Changed

To address the reading of the terminal at a determined card, it is necessary to repeat the enablement of the
configuration procedure, as just described.
As we have seen, after first pressing the ―enter‖ key the cursor is moved under the first ―nn‖ field. Pressing it a
second time moves the cursor under the "xx" field.
Using the arrow keys, at this point, the card address field that the terminal will read can be modified.
The values that will appear are the address of the cards present online at that time.
After having selected the desired address, and confirmed using the ―enter‖ key, the following template will appear

Terminal Config
Press ENTER
to continue

Pressing the ―enter‖ key again the template will appear.

P:xx Adr Priv/Shared

Trm1 None –
Trm2 None –
Trm3 None –Ok?N

This template is thus interpreted and used:

P:xx; Indicates the address of the card to which it is connected;

Adr: Indicates the column in which the addresses of the terminals must be selected;
Priv/Shared: Indicates the column where the user must select whether the terminal is to be private or shared;
Trm1-2-3; These are the terminals to configure;
None; Where the address of the terminal to manage must be selected. The address is selected by
using the arrows. After having selected the address of the terminal by pressing the ―enter‖ key it
passes to the next field;
--; In the fields of this column, for each addressed terminal, it must be decided whether it will be the
private type ―Pr‖ or shared ―Sh‖. The choice is made by using the arrows and will be confirmed
with the ―enter‖ key;
Ok?N: After having completed the selection, when the cursor is moved under the letter ―N‖, it is changed
to ―Y‖ by using the arrows and the configuration is confirmed by pressing the ―enter‖ key.

29
 3.3.3 Addressing for a single network unit
Also in the case a single unit is managed, the simple connection of a card with a terminal creates a pLAN network. It
is vital that the address of the components is the same as that reported in the ―addressing the network element‖
paragraph in the table of the addresses of a single unit.
To address the terminal proceed as follows:
 Using the procedure just described it must reach as far as the last template viewed in the previous
paragraph.
 Within the configuration template, move the cursor alongside the writing ―Trm1‖,
 Use the arrows to vary the addressing field, field changing from ―None‖ to the value of the address of the
terminal that is being configured;
 Confirm with ―enter‖ and access the successive field that should read ―--‖, press the arrows until ―Pr‖
appears;
 Confirm again with ―enter‖ until the cursor is moved under ―N‖.
 Using the arrows, change ―N‖ to ―Y‖ and confirm with ―enter‖.
 If the unit also features the presence of a Slave card, and the programming has taken place using a Master
as a source, the Slave card must be addressed and its reading by the terminal cancelled.
The presence of a remote terminal can be requested in the pLAN network of a unit.
Addressing of the remote terminal occurs with the same procedure as previously seen, by setting its address at ―32‖
and inside the addressing procedure of the reading of the cards by the terminals, setting the address ―32‖ on the
field next to ―Term2‖.
In this case, since the two terminals refer to a single unit, it can be set either as private ―Pr‖, or shared ―Sh‖.
In the case of a single terminal, the procedure is concluded as described above.

3.3.4 Addressing several units in a network with a shared terminal

Each unit is fitted with a private terminal with which all the configuration, management and control operations are
performed.
In the case that the management of multiple units in boss-runner function, communication with the exchange of
information between the ―boss‖ and the ―runners‖ are featured, this occurs by means of the pLAN network
connection.
It is vital in the construction of a network that the addresses provided for the individual elements that compose it are
respected, as reported in the paragraph ―addressing the network elements‖.
A ―shared‖ terminal may be present in the network, perhaps for remote installation in relation to the plant, with which
the parameters of all the network units may be accessed.
The terminal addressing procedure can be performed from any of the private terminals and from any shared
terminal.
The operations to carry out are:

- Access to the configuration procedure by simultaneously pressing and holding down the ―arrow‖ and
―enter‖ keys for five seconds, as described previously;
- Use the arrow keys to select the address of the Master card to which the terminal must be addressed and
confirm by pressing the ―enter‖ key;
- Access the configuration template by pressing the ―enter‖ key again;
- Select the address to be configured as private and its ―Pr‖ function on the row of the ―Trm1‖ terminal. Both
selections must each be followed by confirmation with the ―enter‖ key, which automatically moves the
cursor on to the next field;
- Select the row of the terminal ―Trm2‖, address ―32‖ of the shared terminal and the ―Sh‖ function. The
selections must be confirmed with the ―enter‖ key in this case also;
- Press the ―enter‖ key until the cursor is under ―N‖. Change ―N‖ using the arrows to ―Y‖ and confirm with
―enter‖.

The procedure must be repeated, from the second point, for all the Master cards in the network; the choice to set on
the private terminal ―Trm1‖ and on the shared terminal ―Trm2‖ is conventional.

3.3.5 Network status

While the network is in operation the status can be viewed; all the terminals and the power cards connected are
viewed on a specific template with the symbols. Their address is identified by the position of the symbol.
To access the network status templates, press the same keys used to access the terminal addressing templates for
10 seconds.
The following template will appear:

30
 NetSTAT 1- - - - - - 8
T: xx 9 - - - - - -16
Enter 17 - - - - - -24
to quit 25 - - - - 32

T: xx; The address of the active terminal

Enter to quit: press the ―enter‖ key to exit the network status templates

In each row the ―-‖ symbols represent a useful address.

If the address belongs to a terminal, the ―‖ symbol will appear instead of ―-‖, while if it belongs to a power card the
symbol ― ‖ will appear.

Example 1:

1 - - - - - - 8
9 - - - - - - - - 16
17 - - - -  - - - 24
25 - - - - - - - - 32

In the network there are two power cards (one Master and one Slave) with the address 1 and 2 and a private
terminal with address 21 (configuration provided for a unit with 3 or 4 semi-hermetics and autonomous function
compressors).

3.3.6 Verification of the network function

There are 3 LEDs on the cards that report the network functioning status and are used as follows:

LED STATUS DESCRIPTION

Red and green OFF The control has recognised an application that turns in pLAN network
Yellow ON
Red OFF The control is in pLAN connection and is functioning correctly
Green and ON
yellow
Red and green OFF Incorrect BIOS and incorrect application.
Yellow ON flashing
Red, green and ON pulsing With transitory function:
3
Yellow Launch of pCO or boot upgrade terminated.
Red, green and Fast Incorrect application
Yellow simultaneous
flashing
Green OFF Disconnected terminal.
Red and yellow

31
4 HARDWARE VERIFICATION

Causes of unit or system malfunction may be the result of problems on the network connection between the
components or the digital and analog inputs and outputs connections.
In relation to the status of the digital inputs and outputs, it is possible to verify that which reads the control by the
means of the relative templates in the I/O branch and compare it with the real status.
In regards to the network connections and the analog inputs, instructions are reported in the following chapters for
searching for, identifying and, when possible, resolving any problems

4.1 Search for network breakdowns

The main problems that may be verified in a line are:

Problem Possible causes and solutions

The terminal buzzer sounds for no
reason; when it stops sounding
the display is cancelled (reset
hardware)
- The same address has been given to multiple elements;
Check the configuration of the addresses.
One or more terminals have the address at 0.
Check the configuration of the addresses.
- The network connections have not been performed correctly.
- It is possible that the data lines (tx+ / rx+ and/or tx- / rx-) are short-
circuited to earth or disconnected;
Check the connections.
- A Pco card may be damaged.

The display of some terminal is Enter the configuration procedure, if in the ―I/O board Adr‖ row the field
switched off of the address is ―-‖, meaning that the terminal has not been configured.
Follow the terminal configuration procedure.

The alarm template appears with - The terminal does not receive signals from the network, the
the writing ―NO LINK‖ connections are interrupted.
Verify all the network connections.
There are no elements of the network connected to the terminal.

The alarm message ―I/O board xx - The power card with the address ―xx‖ does not work correctly.
fault‖ appears Check the LEDs of the corresponding card.

The green LED of the addressing - The power card is not receiving the network signal; the connections
card is not turned on are wrong.
Verify all the connections.
There are no other elements connected to the network

The green LED of the addressing - See the previous point.

card comes on and goes off
periodically

The unit is not launched (LED on Verify that there the presence of network voltage.
3
the pCO of a switched off
network presence, LCD turned off,
other LEDs turned off)

Incorrect reading of the signals in - Check any calibration of the inputs (programme).
3
input - Check the correct power supply of the pCO and the probes.
3
- Separate the digital input power supply from the pCO power supply
using a 24 Vac/24 Vac transformer of at least 12 VA.
- Check the correct connection of the wires of the probes.
- Check that the cables of the probes are a sufficient distance from any
possible sources of electromagnetic disturbance like power cables,
contactor cables with high voltage and with high absorption devices
connected at the current.
- If in the presence of a probe error, or an error in the conversion of the
3
pCO , see the paragraph ―analog input verification‖.

32
Problem
Poor signalling of the alarm by
digital input
The continuous control repeatedly
to go in Wach-dog (goes off and
comes on if for some there is a
power failure for a short spell or
some digital and analog outputs
are accidentally activated).
The user terminal is blocked (does
not respond to the pressure of the
keys).
Possible causes and solutions
- Verify the input status from the specific template in the I/O branch.
- Verify the presence of voltage on the input in question between
terminal connector ―C‖ and the relative terminal connector ―Cn‖.
If measured at 24V the input is closed, if they are measured at 0V the
input is open (normally with the input open, the control features the
alarm signal).
- Verify that the power cables are not placed in close proximity to the
control.
- Verify that the sizing of the transformation is correct.
- Verify that the terminal is disconnected, if necessary reconnect it and
switch the control off and then on again with the terminal connected.
33
4.2 Analog input verification
The analog inputs enable grant the reading of live signals 0/1V, 0.5/4.5V or 0/10V, in 0/20 mA or 4/20 mA power or
signals that vary the ohmic value upon the change in temperature.
The following paragraphs report some directions for verifying, by reading the signal, the proper functioning of the
sensor or the correct reading of the input.

4.2.1 Lice active probes

To verify the proper functioning of the live active probes, normally used for measuring temperature or humidity, using
a voltmeter measure between the ―GND‖ terminal connectors and the ―Bn‖ terminal connector relative to the input
connected to the probe to verify; starting from this live value the correspondence with the size read by means of the
general formula can be verified:

(FSmax – FSmin) / (Smax – Smin ) x (Vmis – Smin) + FSmin = Xmis

where:
FSmax = Maximum full scale value of the probe in relation to the maximum input signal allowed;
FSmin = Minimum full scale value of the probe in relation to the minimum signal in input allowed;
Smax = Maximum live value admitted by the input;

Smin = Minimum live value admitted by the input;

Vmis = Live value measured in Volts on the input;

Xmis = Value read on the control;

Example: Using a probe with a work field ranging from 0 bars to 45 bars with a signal from 0.5 V to 4.5 V, and
measuring between the terminal connector ―GND‖ and the 2.7Vdc connected input, the pressure read from the
control will be:

(45 – 0) / (4.5 – 0.5) x (2.7 – 0.5) + 0 = 24.75 bar

The example refers to ratiometric pressure probes, the only live ones of which the use in this software is provided.

4.2.2 Live active probe

To verify the correct functioning of the live active probe normally used for the pressure measurements, a voltmeter is
placed between the ―GND‖ terminal connectors and the ―Bn‖ terminal connector of the relative input, the drop in
voltage used for calculating the current on the input is detected.
The calculation is performed by applying the formula I = V / R, knowing that the impedance ―R‖ of the input is 100
ohm.
By using the general formula seen in the preceding paragraph, and substituting the live value read of the power in
the input calculated, is obtained:

(FSmax – FSmin) / (Smax – Smin ) x (Vmis/100 – Smin) + FSmin = Xmis

Example: By using a probe with a work field ranging from 0 to 30 bars with a signal from 4 to 20 mA, and measuring
between the ―GND‖ terminal connector and the 15.2 Vdc connected input, the pressure read by the control will have
to be:
(30 – 0) / (0.2 – 0.04) x (15.2 / 100 – 0.04) + 0 = 21.0 bar

34
 4.2.3 Passive ―NTC‖ probe and PT1000
NTC, NTC for high temperature and PT1000 probes are used to read the temperature. These probes change the
value of its electrical resistance to upon the change of temperature.
Disconnecting the probe from the input and, measuring its resistance with a multi-meter enables the value read to be
traced.

NTC probe
°C Kohm °C Kohm °C Kohm
-20 67.74 4 22.99 28 8.94
-16 55.95 8 19.40 32 7.72
-12 46.48 12 16.55 36 6.69
-8 38.75 16 14.12 40 5.82
-4 32.43 20 12.09 44 5.08
0 27.28 24 10.38 48 4.44

NTC probe for high temperatures

°C Kohm °C Kohm °C Kohm
15 78.29 50 18.08 85 5.34
20 62.37 55 14.99 90 4.56
25 50.00 60 12.48 95 3.91
30 40.34 65 10.44 100 3.37
35 32.73 70 8.78 105 2.91
40 26.71 75 7.41 110 2.59
45 21.92 80 6.28 115 1.19

PT1000 probe
°C Kohm °C Kohm °C Kohm
15 1058.5 50 1194.0 85 1328.0
20 1077.9 55 1213.2 90 1347.0
25 1097.3 60 1232.4 95 1366.0
30 1116.7 65 1251.6 100 1385.0
35 1136.1 70 1270.7 105 1403.9
40 1155.4 75 1289.8 110 1422.9
45 1174.7 80 1308.9 115 1441.7

35
5 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROGRAMME FUNCTION

5.1 General
The main objective of the regulator is to keep the temperature of the water at the value of the set point set on the
unit in which it is installed; this is primarily obtained by managing the compressors.
In order to divide the refrigeration capacity of the unit, the control can manage up to four refrigeration circuits, each
composed of four compressors for a maximum of sixteen degrees of power.
The software provides the management of the compressors without the possibility of splitting.
Besides the compressors, the control manages other elements that compose the refrigeration groups, such as
pumps and ventilators, with relative functioning modes and alarms, and the ―accessory‖ functions such as:
condensation and/or evaporation control, the free cooling functions, operation with continuous variation of the set
point from an external signal etc... .
These functions are described in the following paragraphs.
It is necessary to resort to the construction of a local ―pLAN‖ network as described in the previous chapters, also for
the operation of the simplest unit.
Almost all of the parameters (setting, differentials, calibration, delays...), which will be referred to later, can be
modified within the various templates.
The chapter dedicated to the explanation of the templates features descriptions of all the parameters and their use
by the control.
In the description of the various functions, a minimum competence in the operation of the unity and the conscience
of the relative refrigeration and hydraulic circuits are taken for granted.
It is to be expected that all descriptions refer to refrigeration units correctly installed in accordance to the
specifications of the relative Blue Box documentation.

5.2 Fundamental functions

The fundamental functions comprise the functioning of a refrigeration unit, independently of the external conditions
and other accessory functions that can be requested.

5.2.1 Unit in stand-by mode

The unit is in stand-by when it is correctly powered by either the electric or the hydraulic side. The first start-up is
performed but not enabled to function.
In this condition the control will show the values read by the analog input and the status of the inputs and the digital
outputs on the display. Moreover, none of the outputs will be automatically enabled by the control, except any alarm
signals as described hereinafter.
To enable the unit in stand-by mode, the digital input for the remote enabling signal provided between the terminal
connectors 1 and 2 must be closed, and launch command must be given from the keyboard or via serial supervision
according to that provided in the system.
As we will see later, it is fundamental that the first launch is performed so that the unit can be started.

5.2.2 Unit enabling

The unit is understood as enabled to function when the activation of the outputs can occur automatically following
the system requirements.
This condition is prevalent when all the enable signals for the functioning seen in the preceding paragraph are
simultaneously present.
The unit views the system requirements by means of the reference water probe reading.
Activation of the outputs of the control that command the various parts of the refrigeration unit occurs by respecting
the relative functioning modes.

5.2.3 Pump management

In the control function the management of the pump for the circulation of the water in the system can be provided,
the launch of which occurs automatically when the unit is turned on.
36
The control provides the management of up to three pumps with the possibility, depending on the number of pumps
to manage, of different functioning logics.
With the management of a single pump, the functioning of the unit will be subject to its correct functioning, so the
breakdown of the pump will cause the unit to halt.
With the management of two pumps, the control manages them one as a reserve of the other with the cyclic
activation to reach the set rotation time; Furthermore, in the case of breakage of the functioning pump, the control
will launch the reserve. At the moment of the alternation in operation between the two pumps, they work
simultaneously for several seconds in order to maintain the continuity of the passage of the water in the system.
Finally, management of the three pumps involves the simultaneous operation of all for the correct flow rate of the
water in the system; Halting due to breakage of a pump will cause the forced splitting of the refrigeration circuits with
the stopping of a compressor per circuit; The stopping of the second pump due to breakdown will cause the entire
unit to be halted.
In the management of the three pumps, facilitating putting the system in operation as described later is also
automatically provided.
The control allows the flywheel to be used, constituted by the heat accumulation, if the passing of the unit from the
functioning status to that the stand-by mode occurs by opening the digital input intended for the external enable
signal.
By opening the digital input, the circulation of the water is stopped with a delay in relation to switching off the last
compressor.

5.2.4 Compressor launch

The control starts the compressors automatically when the unit is in operation and there are no active alarms in
relation to the entire unit or the compressors in operation.
After starting the unit, within the set time, the input of the flow switch must be closed so that the control can enable
the compressors.
The flow switch input, in the event that it should be opened during unit operation, is ignored due to a delay prior to
stopping the operation of said unit.
In the case of blocking the unit due to the opening of the flow switch, the relative alarm appears.
The activation and deactivation of the compressors and their splittings occur by means of the control, following the
system requirements and according to the type of function selected.

5.2.5 Functioning in chiller mode

In functioning in chiller mode, the objective of the control is to lower the temperature of the water, theoretically
keeping it close to the set point value set.
The management of the compressor outputs and the relative splittings is connected to the configuration set on the
unit.
The control enabled to operating the compressors by verifying the difference between the value of the temperature
of the reference water and the value of the set point value set.
The value of the temperature of the reference water can be read on the input or the output in relation to the unit.
The way in which the control enables the compressors changes depending on where the value of the reference
water is read.
When the temperature of the water is read on the entrance of the unit, the control activates and deactivates the
degrees of power within the differential, which is placed after the set point. When the reading is performed on the
unit output, the control activates and deactivates the degrees of power, when the temperature is outside of the dead
zone. The dead zone is positioned after the set point.
The activation of the degrees of power, and therefore the splitting of the unit, are described in the paragraphs of the
chapter dedicated to the auxiliary functions.

5.2.6 Heat pump function

In heat pump operation, the aim of the control is to increase the value of the water, theoretically keeping it close to
the value of the set point set.
The management of the output of the compressors and the relative splittings is related to the configuration set on the
unit.
The control enables the compressors to operate by verifying the difference between the value of the temperature of
the reference water and the value of the set point set.
As for functioning in chiller mode, the value of the reference water temperature can be read on the input and output
of the unit.

37
The way in which the control enables the compressors changes depending on where the reference water value is
read.
When the temperature of the water is read at the input of the unit, the control activates and deactivates the degrees
of power inside the differential. In this case, in difference to the functioning in chiller mode, it is placed ahead of the
set point.
When the read at the output of the unit, the control activates and deactivates the degrees of power, when the
temperature is outside of the dead zone, it is also placed ahead of the set point.
As reported in the preceding paragraph, the activation of the degrees of power and therefore the splitting of the unit
are described in the paragraphs of the chapter dedicated to the auxiliary functions.

5.2.7 Passing from chiller mode to heat pump and vice versa
The change of operation from chiller mode to heat pump and vice versa, aside from during the defrosting operations,
can occur at any moment, from an external signal with digital input and from keyboard or by serial means.
Changes during the defrosting operations are described in the relative paragraph.
In any case, before launching the selected operation unit again, the control disables the inputs of the compressors
and waits for the minimum delay set in the Service branch to pass.
Once this time has passed the unit is automatically started according to the load requirements.
The correct management of the changes from chiller mode to heat pump and vice versa is primarily indispensable
for the proper operation of the unit and, no less importantly, for the useless energy consumption caused by frequent
changes over time.
Normally the seasonal change occurs with a stopped unit, although as we have seen change with an operational unit
is also possible. In this case it is necessary to know the procedure followed by the control for the change of function
in order to understand what appears on the display.
At the moment the function is changed, the control changes the selected function on the display, keeping the set
point of the previous function and therefore begins switching off the compressors; it performs the procedure of
switching off the compressors.
When all the compressors are turned off, the function change delay begins in the same starting operation.
Having terminated the function change delay, therefore after the pressure has balanced, the control changes the
status of the input of the 4-way valves, changes the set point and begins switching on the compressors.

5.3 Auxiliary functions

The auxiliary functions comprise the operations and managements in safety, which guarantee the proper functioning
of the refrigeration group and avoid the occurrence of poor operations and breakages in critical conditions.

5.3.1 Heating the carter oil

Before starting the compressors, the electrical resistances of the carter must be and remain powered for enough
time to ensure that the cooling liquid is not mixed with the oil.
The oil heating time is a factory set parameter.
The control verifies that the heating of the oil lasts for enough time to allow the start-up of the compressors.
The control can perform this verification by knowing the moment the main switch that powers the electrical panel is
turned off and therefore both the control and the resistances of the carter oil of the compressors simultaneously.
In addition to start-ups or the change of season function, where the unit can disconnected from the mains for an
extended period and all of the time necessary is required for heating the oil carter of the oil, temporary ―black outs‖
can occur.
In the case of a ―black-out‖ the control calculates the heating time in relation to the duration of that black out starting
from a minimum of five minutes to the maximum provided value.

38
 Black-out time
(min.)
Min. time
Max. time
Carter oil heating time (min.)

The figure shows the curve of the heating time variation depending on the ―black-out‖ time.
There can be the environmental conditions tied to the type of unit and the installation or which it is possible to reduce
the time necessary for the heating of the carter oil and therefore allow it to anticipate the activation of the unit.
The control reduces the time by detecting the air temperature.
Conditions can occur that call for the exceptional necessity to start the compressors without having to wait for the
complete heating of the oil.
To this end, the heating time can be reset in the Maintenance branch.
Resetting the heating time is pertinent solely to a start-up therefore; if there is a new power failure after resetting the
heating, the heating time is calculated by the control with the methods seen previously.

5.3.2 Evaporator anti-freeze

If the temperature of the water in output from a exchanger is less than the value limit set in the anti-freeze setting,
the control will intervene by stopping the compressors of the refrigeration circuits in question and activating the anti-
freeze alarm.
Once the anti-freeze alarm has intervened, in order to be able to cancel and therefore enable re-starting of the
compressor or compressors in question, the value of the water temperature that has caused the alarm must be
greater than the value of the intervention increased by the anti-freeze differential.
The intervention of the anti-freeze alarm causes the whole unit to stop, and therefore all the refrigeration group
compressors, in the event that a single exchange for the hydraulic circuit of use is provided.
In the case the temperature in output drops below the value of the anti-freeze set, with the unit in stand-by mode, the
alarm does not appear.

5.3.3 Anti-freeze resistance

Once the conditions are verified that activate the anti-freeze alarm, the output of the heating resistance will be
enabled automatically.
Its function is to keep the temperature of the water inside the exchangers higher than the safety limit to prevent them
from freezing.
The output will remain enabled for the whole time the conditions for the anti-freeze alarm persist.
In difference to the alarm that is signalled only with a unit switched on, the output of the anti-freeze resistance is
enabled also in the stand-by mode.
In some particular configurations or functions there is no output intended for the anti-freeze resistance, to identify the
functions in question see ―Input and output list‖ paragraphs in the ―I/O" chapter.

5.3.4 Function of the compressors

The activation of the compressors occurs only when the unit operates correctly and therefore in the absence of
alarms as reported in the preceding paragraphs, and the value of the temperature of the water to control requires it.
The control will activate the compressors one at a time and per circuit, according to the set logic, and the system
request.
These adjustments allow the unit inrush currents to be reduced.

39
In each case the activation of the compressors, from the control takes place by observing their good operation, given
their continued verification of the states of safety and in respect of the times set.
By means of the digital and analog inputs, the control verifies the safety status of the compressors.
The main safety measures regard the high and low pressure values and the control of the temperature inside the
facilitating of the compressors.
The operation of the compressors depends also on the state of the safety measures, also in regards to the stopping
and functioning times.
When the launch of the unit is requested, the first compressor is launched with a delay in relation to the starting of
the pump.
This delay is respected, also if the management of the pump is not provided.
In any way, once the compressors are started, even water temperature cooling or heating request is satisfied, they
can not be stopped until the operation time has passed.
The respect of the minimum functioning is ignored only if a serious alarm intervenes.
The serious alarms that can stop the compressor during the minimum functioning time are the high pressure alarm
and the compressor heat alarm for the compressors, the pressure switch and the anti-freeze regarding the unit.
Once stopped, each compressor can be started again only after the minimum stopping time has passed and in any
way, after the minimum time between two consecutive start-ups (anti-recycle) has passed.
The consecutive activation of two compressors occurs with minimum delays equal to the ―delayed activation‖ time.
The consecutive deactivation of two compressors occurs with the same delay.

5.3.5 The alarm of the compressors

For the proper functioning of the compressors, the control must verify that there are no alarms regarding it.
The alarms pertinent to the compressors are high pressure, low pressure and the heat protections.
The high and low pressure alarms regard all the compressors of the same refrigeration circuit while the ―heat
protection‖ alarm refers to each single compressor.
The control verifies that, while at least one compressor of the refrigeration circuit is operating:
- The value of the inlet pressure read by the relative probe is always less than the ―hp1‖ value during the
operation both in cooling for the chiller mode only units and in heat pump in the units where this functioning is
provided; If the value is exceeded when all the compressors of the refrigeration circuit are active, the control
stops one immediately; Normally, the high pressure alarm is set to limited automatic reset, therefore the viewing
of the alarm and the definitive stopping of a compressor occurs only upon reaching this limit.
The ―hp1‖ high pressure alarm can be removed manually on the control only when the pressure read by the inlet
pressure probe is less than the value that has caused the intervention, reduced by the high pressure differential.
The ―hp2‖ high pressure limit is used as a safety in the case of functioning in recovery and, in this case, its
manual or automatic reset can be selected, other information is reported in the paragraph relative to the
recovery operation. Besides the high pressure alarm given by the analog input of the control, there is the input
given by the intervention of the mechanical pressure switch. The intervention of the mechanical pressure switch
immediately stops all of the compressors depending on the relative circuit and is marked on the display and with
the luminous indication. Normally the mechanical pressure switch is a manual reset and in any case the alarm
caused by its intervention must be cancelled manually.
- The value of the intake pressure read by the relative probe is always greater than the ―lp1‖ value during the
functioning in cooling and ―lp2‖ during the functioning in heat pump. If the value read by the intake pressure
probe less than the ―lp1‖ and ―lp2‖ limits in the relative functioning conditions when all the compressors of the
refrigeration circuit are active, the control stops a compressor and displays the low pressure alarm. Halting the
compressors due to the low pressure alarm is not instantaneous, but is ignored, with the relative delays, both at
the launch and during the functioning. Normally, unless differently set in the manufacturing branch, the low
pressure alarm can be removed manually on the control only when the pressure read by the intake probe is
greater than the value that has caused the intervention increased by the relative differential.
- The management of the cancellation of the high pressure alarms, both by analog and digital input, and low
pressure alarms, depends on the setting done in the manufacturer branch. Essentially, the manual or ―limited
automatic‖ resetting of these alarms can be set in the manufacturer branch. The argument is treated in the
paragraph that regards the automatic resetting of the alarms.
- The heat alarm regards each compressor and is activated with the opening of the relative digital input; the
opening of the digital input relative to the heat alarm immediately stops the operation of the relative compressor;
normally, the alarm is limited automatic reset and is not marked on the display of the control until it becomes
definitive.

40
5.3.6 Compressor management
The activation of the compressor outputs is done from the control following the variation of the temperature of the
reference water in relation to the set point set.
The reference water temperature can be detected at the unit input or output. If the temperature of the reference
water is read at the output of the refrigeration unit, management of the compressors is described between the
accessory functions in the operation paragraph with the output water temperature.
All of the outputs of the compressors are managed by the control as degrees of power.
If only the (P) ―proportional‖ management is set, the various degrees of power are enabled within the functioning
differential in a manner proportional to the distancing of the temperature of the reference water from the value of the
set point imposed.
In the case the (P + I) ―proportional plus integration time‖ functioning is provided, the control, in addition to the
degrees requested by the only proportional operation, forces the activation of further degrees of power.
The forcing occurs upon reaching the ―I‖ time set; the time is increased if the temperature of the water draws near
the set point, and is reduced if the temperature of the water moves away from it.
The activation of the compressors occurs alternatively with the ―FPM‖ operation logic, one per refrigeration circuit
featured.
With the ―CPM‖ operation logic the activation of the compressors occurs when the all the compressors of a same
circuit are turned on, before passing to the next.
Upon the reduction of the load requirement, i.e. that as the temperature of the reference water drawing near the set
point set, it reduces the number of degrees of power activated by the control.
The deactivation of the degrees of power by the control occurs in inversely in relation to the activation and therefore,
upon the reduction of the load there is a deactivation of the compressors, one per circuit if it is provided the ―FPM‖
logic or the deactivation of all the compressors of a same circuit before deactivating those of the next, if the ―CPM‖
logic is provided.
Balancing the operation hours on all the compressors that compose the unit occurs by selecting the rotation of the
operation request.
With the rotation of the functioning request activated, the compressor that is launched first, will be the first to be
stopped; among all the compressors that are not in operation, the control will activate the one which has been
stopped for longest.

5.3.7 Definition of degrees of power

The number of degrees of power of a unit corresponds to a unit at the amount provided by the number of the
compressors present.
The total number of degrees of power, when the control is provided on the temperature of the incoming water, is
divided within the operational differential.
Each degree, within the operational differential, is placed on a ―degree set‖ point and has a hysteresis around which
the ―degree differential‖ activation and the deactivation occurs.
The set of each degree is found at half of the relative differential.

100%diff.lefunzionamento

diff.le1° diff.le2° diff.le3° diff.le4° diff.le5° diff.le6° diff.le7° diff.le8°

gradino gradino gradino gradino gradino gradino gradino gradino
12,5% 12,5% 12,5% 12,5% 12,5% 12,5% 12,5% 12,5%

Temperaturadell'acqua
Set point
iningresso°C
funzionam ento
6,2% 18,8% 31,3% 43,8% 56,3% 68,8% 81,25 93,8
Set 1° Set 2° Set 3° Set 4° Set 5° Set 6° Set 7° Set 8°
gradino gradino gradino gradino gradino gradino gradino gradino

Graphical representation of 8 degrees within a differential

To remain independent from the value of the unit operational differential, the set of each degree and the relative
differential are expressed in a percentage value of the operational differential.

5.3.8 Condensation control

By means of its control, the condensation pressure can be maintained within an interval of redefined functioning.
41
To keep the value of the condensation pressure within a predefined functioning interval, an analog output is available
on the control with a voltage signal that varies from 0 -10V and can be used with an external control for regulating
ventilator speed.
The pressure control by means of sending a 0-10V signal to an external regulator is continuously defined.
For the activation of the analog output, the condensation pressure must reach the value provided by adding the ―set
point‖ to the ―summer start-up differential‖.
Once launched, the output will modulate the signal by varying it from the minimum value set up to 100%, to increase
the condensation pressure, within the ―control differential‖.
In relation to the ―set point‖ value, the deactivation of the ―cut-off‖ output occurs.
Each refrigeration circuit is equipped with its analog output for the control of the condensation pressure.
The parameters to set on the control for managing the analog output are expressed with the temperature of the
refrigeration gas; this maintains the same values independently of the refrigeration used.
In the case that the physical construction of the condenser leads to the same ventilators being in common with
several circuits, it is therefore necessary that the regulation is solely for the circuits in question.
This result is obtained through the parallel connection of the analog outputs of the circuits in question.
With the parallel connection of two or more signals the control will operate with the larger of them.
The functioning of the condensation control is graphically represented in the figure.

dcrv
Velocità %

Velocità max.
dea

Velocità min.

Temperatura di
strv condensazione °C

Speed %

Min. speed
Max. speed

Condensation temperature

The condensation control can be activated both in the chiller unit only and in the heating pump unit. It is active in the
heating pump units only while the chiller is in operation.
The condensation control is ignored in the heat pump operation, and therefore the ventilators are forced to the
maximum.
The management of the ventilators during the defrosting phase is reported in the paragraph regarding defrosting
management.
The condensation pressure control can be set in the heating pump unit, independently of the presence or lack of
evaporation control.
The same analog output with the appropriate setting for the regulation parameters can be used for the condensation
control, by means of a valve, in the units with a water condenser. In this case, if there are multiple cooling circuits in
the unit, the relative outputs must be connected parallely.

5.3.9 Condensation control for units with free cooling

In the free cooling units it is necessary to always provide the presence of the condensation control.
In the units in which free cooling is an integral part of the unit, where the ventilators of the condenser are the same
as free cooling and the water battery is installed ahead of the condenser battery, the condensation pressure control
occurs by means of battery splitting.
Naturally, the condenser battery must be predisposed for this type of functioning and therefore be divided into two
parts.
The most complex case provided for the condensation management is where the battery is divided into two parts to
be managed in binary mode.

42
The division must be type 2/5 and 3/5, while the binary management by the control will lead to an increase in
condensation pressure, to the progressive activation of 2/5, therefore of 3/5, finally both divisions making it function
at 5/5.
The activation occurs for each single cooling circuit by means of digital outputs with reference to the pressure values
read by the transducers.
The passage from one fraction of the condenser battery to the other takes place by means of two set points.
When the pressure exceeds the first set point the control passes from functioning at 2/5 to 3/5.
At the moment of passing from 2/5 to 3/5, for a settable time, both digital outputs remain powered.
When the pressure exceeds the second set point, the control passes from functioning at 3/5 to 5/5.
At each increase in the active battery division (from 2/5 to 3/5 and from 3/5 to 5/5), it has a sudden reduction in the
inlet pressure, therefore there is an ―exchange time‖ delay to each increase in the battery division used that avoids
the previous return.
Once the exchange time has passed, at any time the pressure drops below each set reduced by the differential
relative, the control reduces the fraction of the battery in operation.
The values for managing this function can be selected in the ―Service‖ branch and some are limited.
The set point values for changing the active battery division can be set between ―16.0‖ and the limited value set for
high pressure ―HP‖ safety reduced by 1bar, the differential values are downwards at ―3.0‖ while there is no upward
limit, the exchange time between ―0‖ and ―20‖.
For the proper function of the units, it is a good idea to avoid modifying the values set without consent of the Blue
Box technical office.
This condensation control is indispensable, when the value of the air temperature can be used for operation in free
cooling while, for greater temperatures, at the launching of the compressors, the splitting procedures of the
condenser battery, it is useless.
For this reason, an air temperature can be set above which, at the launch of the compressors, the condenser battery
is activated at 100%.
For requirements necessary for the time necessary for communication between the Master card and the addition,
the control predisposes the powering of a fraction of the condensing battery, before launching the respective
compressor.
The advance powering of a fraction of the battery is used to avoid starting the compressor, the intervention of the
high pressure protections.

5.3.10 Evaporation control

In the heating pump unit, during the hot water production operation, it may be necessary to maintain the value of the
evaporation pressure within a predefined functioning interval.
The same analog output, used during the cold water production function for the condensation control, can be used
during the hot water production operation with the same 0-10V signal for commanding an external control that
regulates the ventilator speed.
The behaviour of the analog output for the evaporation control is similar to that for the controlling the condensation
naturally, referring to the evaporation pressure.
To activate the analog output, the evaporation pressure must reach the value provided by subtracting the ―winter
launch differential‖ from the ―set point‖.
Once launched, the output will modulate the signal by varying it from the minimum value set up to 100%, upon the
reduction of the evaporation pressure, within the ―control differential‖.
In relation to the ―set point‖ value, the deactivation of the output, ―cut-off‖, occurs.
As for the control of the condensation, each refrigeration circuit is equipped with analog output for the evaporation
pressure control.
As for the condensation control, the parameters to set on the control for the managing the analog output are
expressed with the temperature of the refrigeration gas, in order to keep the same values independently of the
cooling used.
In the case that the physical construction of the condenser/evaporator means that the same ventilators are in
common with multiple circuits, it is therefore necessary that have a unique regulation for the circuits in question.
This result is obtained through the parallel connection of the analog outputs of the circuits in question.
With the parallel connection of two or more signals, the control will function with the greater of them.
The function of the evaporation control is graphically represented in the figure.

43
 derv

Velocità %
Velocità max.
dia

Velocità min.

Temperatura di
evaporazione °C strv

The evaporation control only features in the units provided for the heat pump function.

The same analog output with the appropriate setting of the regulation parameters can be used for the evaporation
control, by means of a valve, in the heat pump units with water source. In this case, if there are multiple refrigeration
circuits in the unit, the relative outputs must be connected in parallel.

5.3.11 Defrosting
Defrosting is the procedure with which, during the functioning in heat pump of an air/water unit, the accumulation of
frost on the condenser/evaporator battery is foresee and/or any formation is eliminated.
An efficient defrosting procedure ends with a completely clean condenser/evaporator battery.
The control manages the defrosting in a different way, according to the settings made on the control and the
conditions of the air temperature.
The defrosting can occur by only taking advantage of the temperature of the air with the inversion of the refrigeration
circuit function.
The condition for launching the defrosting can be chosen in the constructor branch between the low pressure signal
or between the temperature of the ambient air and the intake gas.
In the first case, it entails a comparison between a set value and a value read by the control on the low pressure of
the functioning circuits. Secondly, the control performs a calculation with the parameters set and compares the result
with the values measured to assess the effectiveness of battery exchange.
The efficiency reduces with the presence of frost and/or ice that limit the exchange.
The values to set for calculating the battery efficiency are the difference that should be measured between the
temperature of the air and the temperature of the intake gas when the air temperature is ―0°C‖ and a correction
coefficient that takes account of its variation.

The actual defrosting of the condenser/evaporator battery is a part of the ―defrosting cycle‖ that takes place by
adhering to a precise procedure.
In order for the defrosting cycle to begin, the condition that requires it must continue for a minimum period.
In the units comprising multiple circuits, the defrosting can occur for all of them simultaneously or for every single
circuit separately.
The first defrosting will in any case be related to a minimum functioning time of the same unit, in order to allow the
formation of a minimum heat flywheel to guarantee the complete execution.
Independently of the condition that requires defrosting, if the ambient air temperature is higher than a set limit value,
the control activates the air defrosting.
The air defrosting occurs by stopping the active compressors one by one and leaving the ventilators on, and it ends
when the maximum time is reached.
When the defrosting ends by reaching the maximum temperature, in the defrosting operations ad aria, it is not
detected by the control as irregular functioning, as occurs in defrosting operations with cycle inversion.
Defrosting with cycle inversion occurs as the unit passes from heat pump function to chiller function and by
deactivating the ventilator outputs.
Before beginning the defrosting, in the case of the separate defrosting of the refrigeration circuits, operation at 100%
of the potentiality of the circuit in question is required, or in the case that the simultaneous defrosting of all the
refrigeration unit is provided, all the unit component compressors that are not stopped due to breakdown or forcing
excluded from operation will be activated at 100%.

44
In the case of separate defrosting of the refrigeration circuits, the beginning of the defrosting of the diverse circuits
occurs by respecting the relative interval set.
With the inversion of the function from heat pump to chiller, the ventilators of the circuits in question are stopped.
Until the temperature of the battery is less than the temperature for defrosting, the control manages the inlet
refrigeration pressure by maintaining its temperature at less than that of fine defrosting.
The value of the inlet pressure is controlled by making the ventilators turn the opposite direction, thus prolonging the
duration of the defrosting until the battery is completely free of frost and/or ice.
The inverse ventilation, in addition to controlling the inlet pressure, pushes the water that is formed on the battery
outwards.
Turning the opposite direction, the ventilators lower the inlet temperature, until the inverse ventilation activation
temperature is reached, less the relative differential. Upon reaching this value, the control stops the ventilators again.
The cycle is repeated until the temperature of the battery reaches the defrosting value and as the probe that detects
the value is in a less favourable position, when the condition is reached, the battery is considered completely clean.
The end of defrosting temperature of the battery can be selected, while its differential is fixed at 1°C and acts for
lower temperature values.
When the end of defrosting temperature is reached, the control inhibits the inverse ventilation, thus allowing the inlet
pressure to reach the end of defrosting temperature.
When the end of defrosting value is reached, the control activates the ventilators to lower the inlet pressure before
again inverting the function from chiller mode to heat pump.
At this point the defrosting is concluded and the control manages the compressors according to the system
requirements.
Any irregular functions that may be verified during the various phases described are also managed from the control.
In the case in which the temperature of the inlet gas is greater than the value di fine defrosting at the first cycle
inversion, the control forces the defrosting for the minimum time set.
If the temperature of the inlet gas reaches the value of defrosting, regardless of the contrary rotation of the
ventilators, or if the temperature detected on the battery has not reached the value predicted at the end of the
defrosting, the control interrupts it, concluding it normally by disabling the output of the contrary ventilation and
activating that normal ventilation after several seconds.
Moreover, if the defrosting lasts for an excessive amount of time, more than the maximum, the control concludes it
independently from its reaching all of the conditions necessary for the normal conclusion.
With alarm templates, the control records and displays the defrosting operations that are terminated with reaching
the maximum time without interrupting the operation of either the unit or the compressors.
The defrosting alarm for the maximum time automatically disappears from the active alarm templates, when a
defrosting ends normally on the refrigerating inlet gas reaching the temperature of fine defrosting.
That which is described refers to a refrigeration circuit for independent defrosting.
In the case of simultaneous defrosting, when a circuit reaches the temperature value of the inlet gas for activating
the inverse ventilation, the control activates the relative output for all the circuits present. As when the temperature of
the end of inlet defrosting refrigeration is reached, the control stops it for all.

The control features an analog input for the detecting the temperature of the battery and a digital output for the
inverse ventilation for each refrigeration circuit in the unit.
During functioning in heat pump, a defrosting may be forced by means of the command available in the ―Service‖
branch.
Most of the parameters that manage the defrosting operations can be set in the ―Service‖ branch.

45
5.4 Accessory functions
The accessory functions comprise all the functions that allow the use of the refrigeration units to be adapted to the
system requirements.

5.4.1 Digital input ―auxiliary voltage failure‖

The input can be used both for verifying the correct sequence of the phases and for controlling the correct value of
the power supply voltage.
Control of the sequence of the phases and of the power supply voltage occurs by means of the dry contact of the
suitable relay.
3
The dry contact is connected to the digital input of the pCO , which interprets its functioning.
Once this interval is passed, the control ignores the opening of the input.
If the input of the control is not closed at the moment of the power supply and does not stay closed for the delay
alarm voltage, the control does not allow the inputs to activate and displays the alarm templates sequence error
phases.
The cancellation of the alarm occurs only by removing the voltage from the control, a vital operation for correcting
the connection of the sequence of the phases.
By managing the verification of the power supply, the digital input opens at any moment, the control halts the outputs
and displays the auxiliary power failure alarm template.
Until the digital input remains open the control keeps the unit locked.
When the digital input is closed, and remains closed for the set restoration delay, indicating that the voltage of the
power supply falls within the normal values, the control allows the second unit to be launched once again in
accordance to the load requirements and automatically the alarm template from the active ones.

5.4.2 Free cooling

Free cooling is the function that enables the air temperature to be used to cool the user water.
Essentially, when the conditions for free cooling are in place, the water first crosses the evaporator and is cooled in
an air/water exchange.
In the units where provided, the free cooling function is automatically enabled when the air temperature is less than
the return temperature from the system, reduced by the free cooling differential and the fixed hysteresis of 0.5°C.
The hysteresis of 0.5°C is a fixed value that can not be modified, and is used to avoid uncertain functions of the
control, in the case in which the air temperature is very close to the enablement value.

differenziale
freecooling

temperatura tem peraturaacqua

aria ritornoim pianto
°C

freecoolingON freecoolingOFF

free
cooling differential
air temperature
system return water temperature

Free cooling can be obtained through different solutions. The control provides the possibility of managing the free
cooling with a water battery before the condenser batteries. In this case the unit ventilators are used for functioning
both of the batteries.
Another solution is with the water battery installed separately from the condenser batteries and, therefore, each
battery is equipped with its own ventilators. This type of free cooling is defined as ―external‖.
Finally, to limit the quantity of glycol in the system, between the external free cooling and the circuit of use, there can
be an intermediary water/water exchange. In the control this management provides an exchange called "decoupling‖,
thanks to its management.
The activation of the free cooling brings with it the function of the outputs dedicated to the control of the ventilators
as degrees of refrigerating power.

46
In the case of the simultaneous functioning of the free cooling and the compressors, the ventilators managed as
degrees of refrigeration power are activated before the compressors and deactivated afterwards.
With control of the temperature of the input water to the evaporator, when the free cooling function is active, the
functioning differential is divided in half, the degrees of power given from the ventilators are in the first half, and the
degrees of power provided by the compressors are in the second half.
The condensation pressure control is required when the free cooling function active.
With the free cooling battery installed before the condenser batteries, control of the condensation pressure takes
place with the splitting into steps of the condenser batteries.
In the other cases, the condensation control takes place using the signal of the relative analog output.
The function of the condensation control is described in the relative paragraphs.
Besides managing the ventilators as degrees of power, there is a valve in the free cooling that diverts the passage of
the water in the battery when the function is active.
The control provides the possibility of managing both an on/off valve and a modulator.
With the presence of the decoupling exchanger, the digital output that normally manages the valve is used to
manage a circulation water pump between the exchange and the battery.
In addition to the pump, with the decoupling exchanger an input for a pressure switch to insert in the same hydraulic
circuit is also managed.
The free cooling valve, whether controlled from the digital output or the analog or the circulation water pump on the
battery/exchanger circuit when the decoupling exchanger is present, is disabled when the value of the temperature
of the reference water is less than the function setting of the unit reduced by the disabling differential.
If the analog output controls the free cooling valve, its opening inside the differential will vary from 0 to 110%
between the disablement temperature value and that of the functioning set point.

ddv
valvola/uscitaON

%
valvola/uscitaOFF
°C
temperaturaacqua
set point di riferimento

valve/output ON

valve/output OFF

set point reference

water temperature

Another control function connected to the free cooling management is the stopping of the compressors, when the
temperature of the external air is especially low.
The principle with which this limit is set regards the value of the air temperature, to which the yield of free cooling is
equal to that of the compressors.
In particular cases, such as launching the unit with particularly low air temperature, this adjustment avoids starting
the compressors for a several minutes to not effect, when only the operation of the free cooling can satisfy the
requirement of the load.
The free cooling function can be limited for air temperatures higher than normal running values when the conditions
can influence the correct functioning of the compressors.
The control provides the possibility of setting the higher functioning limit of the free cooling regarding the air
temperature.
If the air temperature exceeds the higher free cooling limit, even with the conditions present, the control does not
activate it.
In the case in which the external free cooling to the unit is provided, whether the intermediary exchanger is present
or not, in addition to the operation as degrees of power the ventilators can be commanded with continuous
modulation.
The signal for the modulation is in 0/10 volt power and the value will vary from the minimum set to the maximum
within the regulation differential provided for the ventilators during the free cooling operation that corresponds to half
the total differential.
Starting the ventilators does not occur at the minimum speed but at the speed that corresponds to the launch
differential.
Y5 is the analog output provided for this management in the units with a single master card, while in the units that
also feature the slave card, a second analog output can be selected which will be the Y5 of the slave card.
47
Even if there are 2 analog outputs, the value of the signal that commands the ventilators will be the same meaning
all the ventilators will turn at the same speed.
On the next page the variation of speed of the free cooling ventilators with control of the input water is represented
graphically.

Segnale massimo

C.1 C.n
Minimum
signal

Set point Reference temperature °C

starting diff

½ diff

Ventilator speed variation with input water control

Even with the water control in output, the control can manage the continuous variation of the free cooling ventilator
speed.
In reality the variation of the continuous speed is transformed into many small degrees of which the voltage
amplitude of each is defined.
The control divides the useful signal for the regulation, provided by the difference between the maximum and the
minimum value, for the amplitude of the steps.
In this way the control defines the number of degrees available for regulating the free cooling ventilators.
When the conditions are present and the free cooling is activated by the control, the degrees of free cooling
ventilators are the first to be activated and the last to be deactivated in relation to the compressors.

5.4.3 Total heat recovery

Heat recovery is the function by which an appropriate exchanger recovers all the energy to dispose of on the
condenser and the use for heating the water.
In addition to the predisposition of the refrigeration circuit, the management on the control must also be provided.
Activation of the recovery occurs with the closure of the relative digital input.
The control activates the heat recovery when the value of the water temperature entering the recovery exchanger is
less than the recovery set point reduced by the differential and will end it when reached.
The limits within which the recovery set point can be set are the same as those defined for the heat pump function.

48
 dvr dr
ricircoloOFF

temperaturaacqua
ricircoloON recupero
°C

set point
recupero

recirculation OFF

recirculation ON
recovery water temperature

recovery set point

With the enablement of the recovery digital output, and therefore with the active recovery, if the temperature of the
water entering the recovery system is less than the set point reduced by the differential, the control disables the unit
ventilator outputs and enables the output for the recovery.
On the control, besides the digital output for the activation of the recovery, there is an analog output for managing
the condensation pressure, by means of regulating the water flow rate on the recovery circuit.
The analog output can therefore be used to command a three-way valve, in order to keep the input water
temperature of the recovery exchanger high enough.
The control manages the valve within the relative differential, which is placed before the recovery differential.
The management of the valve regards the total by-pass of the water of the recovery circuit on the exchanger, when
the temperature of the water is less than the set point reduced by the sum of the two differentials and, the total
sending to the use, when the temperature is higher than the values of the set point reduced by the recovery
differential.
Within its own differential the valve regulates the water flow rate in proportion to the value of the recovery
temperature detected.
a minimum value of opening of the analog output can be set in the control in the case in which one wishes to have a
minimum quantity of water passing in the system at all times, with the active recovery.
For each refrigeration circuit there is a digital output for activating a solenoid valve for the unloading of the cooler
from the condenser battery, when the latter is not used.
For this function, the intake pressure value can be set on the control. The output will be activated under this value
and the battery can therefore be emptied and the value of the differential, added to the opening value, will lead to its
closure.
If the condensation pressure of any of the circuits exceeds the ―hp2‖ pressure value during the heat recovery, the
recovery for that circuit will be disabled and the control will signal the alarm.
The end of recovery alarm for having reached the condensation pressure limits can be selected at manual or
automatic reset.
Normally the reset is manual, in which case it can be cancelled only when the pressure drops below the intervention
value, less the relative differential.
By setting the alarm with automatic reset in the manufacturer branch, the control will inhibit recovery at the time of
the intervention and, will re-enable it automatically, when the pressure drops, without displaying the alarm template.
In the units composed of several refrigeration units, the total heat recovery can occur for the entire unit or for certain
circuits only.
In this case there will be a partial recovery.
The circuits that can do it are defined in the units with partial recovery.
In the units composed of two refrigeration circuits, as well as in the entire unit, recovery can occur in a single circuit
also. In this case it will be circuit ―1‖.
During recovery on the single circuit ―1‖, the control inhibits rotation upon activation of the compressors and,
therefore, the compressors of circuit ―1‖ will be the first to be launched and the last to be stopped.
In the units composed of three refrigerators, in addition to whole unit, the recovery can also take place for a single
circuit. In this case it will be on circuit ―3‖.
During recovery with the single circuit ―3", the control inhibits rotation upon activation of the compressors and,
therefore, the compressors of circuit ―3‖ will be the first to be started and the last to be stopped.
Finally, in the units composed of four refrigeration circuits, as well as in the entire unit, recovery can take place for
one or more circuits. In this case it will be on circuit ―4‖ for one and on circuits ―3‖ and ―4‖ for two.

49
Also in these cases, during recovery, the control inhibits rotation upon the activation of the compressors and,
therefore, the first to be started and the last to be stopped will be the compressors of circuits ―4‖ and ―3‖.

5.4.4 Desuperheater
The presence of the desuperheater does not bring about any change in the functioning of the unit.
Essentially, the exchange of heat on the condenser is not inhibited with the halting of the ventilators while recovery
on the desuperheater takes place.
Moreover, the desuperheater, like the total heat recovery system can be installed on the whole unit or on certain
circuits.
The refrigeration circuits in which the desuperheater can be installed when it is not present on all are the same as
the total recovery system.
In particular, when not featured on all the refrigeration circuits, the activation of the recovery system must take place
by closing the appropriate digital input so that the control can halt the rotation when the refrigeration circuits start.
Thus, the control activates the compressors of the circuit or circuits equipped with desuperheaters first of all.

5.4.5 Continuous set point variation

In addition to the normal use of the keyboard, there can also be other means for varying the set point of the unit
function.
One of these uses is the variation of the set point from the analog input.
The function is also available in the heat pump units.
Arranging the control for setting the set pint of the analog input, the possibility of changing the value from both
keyboard and via serial mode is disabled.
The activation of the degrees of power of the unit, in each case, occurs within the differential set with reference to
the set read by the analog input.
The set point can be varied within the upper and lower limits provided for the setting of the set by keyboard.
In the Service branch, besides the normal setting of the limits of the set point, the temperature limits must be set
within which the type of signal sent to the card will vary.
The type of signal, which the card manages for the variation of the set point, can be chosen from between 0/1V,
0/10V, 0/20mA and 4/20mA.
According to the number of compressors in the unit, the analog input changes for the signal that, in each case, has a
―GND‖ terminal connector as reference.
It is essential that a stable signal be used for the proper functioning of the unit, otherwise, in particular conditions,
continuous compressor switch on and switch off can occur.

5.4.6 Double set point

The function with double set point is possible only during chiller functioning.
With the double set point, the choice of functioning can either be performed by keyboard or by digital input. In any
case, the two values will have to be comprised within the limits provided for the summer setting.
By default or with open digital input the value of the greater setting will always be active.
By choosing to change the keyboard setting the change of setting by digital input will be automatically disabled and
vice versa.
When the value of the reference water temperature reaches the set value for functioning in low temperature, the
control will enable the digital output for the activation of the electro valves, which control the relative thermostatic
valves.
The differential for the change in function from high to low temperature is 1°C and is not accessible.
It is highly important to pay attention when the value of the function set point is less than 5°C as this leads to the
modification of numerous values related to the unit function limits, such as the alarm intervention value at low
pressure, the value of the anti-freeze alarm of the LOP etc.

5.4.7 Functioning with output water temperature

With the control of the output water temperature, the reference probe must be installed at the exchanger output, in
the units with a single exchanger or, in the case of multiple exchangers, in the common piping at the output from the
unit after the collector.
Activation of the degrees of power of the unit will not be related to the functioning differential as the units with input
water control described previously but, to the delays in activation and deactivation in relation to a dead zone.
The control does not activate or deactivate any device, when the reference water temperature is inside the dead
zone.
By device is intended any means, available to the control, aimed at varying the temperature of the water. Therefore
this comprises compressors and, in the case that the free cooling is active, the relative ventilator steps.

50
The control activates a power step, respecting the delay in activation, when the temperature of the water is greater
than the sum between the set point and the differential of the dead zone.
The delay with which the control activates the device depends on the temperature of the reference water measured;
In relation to the increase in temperature of the reference water, it reduces the delay in activation.
The control verifies the temperature of the reference water after the start-up of a device, if the value falls within the
dead zone does a new start-up does not occur. If it remains outside this zone, the control activates a subsequent
step by adhering to the corresponding delay.
The cycle is repeated, if the load requires, until the unit is operating at full load.
Apart from the moment in which the unit is started, where the value of the reference water temperature can be
considerably greater than the set point, normally the control manages the steps of the unit by means of slight
variations in power.
The activation of a step generally reports the temperature of the water inside the dead zone.
The reduction of the requirement of power by the load ensures that the temperature value dropping below the set
point, exits the dead zone.
In the same way the control activated the power steps, when the temperature drops below the set point, the control
deactivates them; naturally the delays and the differential used for the deactivation are different to the activation
delays and differential.
In each case, if the temperature of the water exiting the circuit reaches the set anti-freeze safety value, the relative
compressor is deactivated immediately or, if the reference temperature the switching-off limit of the compressors, all
the compressors will be switched off without delay.
The figure shows a graphic representation of the function.

tem pom ax.

attivazione

tem pom ax.

disattivazione

tem pom in.

tem pom in. attivazione
disattivazione

tem peraturaacqua
diff.lespegn.to zm diff.leaccensione inuscita °C
(valoredi riferimento)
sicurezza lim ite set Temperatura
antigelo speg. com p. funzionam ento massima

Cooling function

max. activation time

max. deactivation time
min. activation time
min. deactivation time
switch-off diff.
turn on diff.
anti-freeze safety
comp. switch-off limit
operation setting
Max. temp.
Outgoing water temp. °C (reference value)

This, just described, is the function provided for the water cooling.

51
Symmetrically, it has the same function when the unit is activated in heat pump.
The next figure shows the function of the output control in heating.

tempom ax.
incrementoinvern.

tempom ax.
decrementoinvern.

tempom in. tempom in.

incrementoinvern. decrementoinvern.

tem peraturainuscita°C
diff.leaccensione zmi diff.lespegn.to (valoredi riferimento)

valore set massima

minimo funzionam ento temp. OUT
invernale

Heating function
max. winter increase time
max. winter decrease time
min. winter increase time
min. winter decrease time
turn on diff.
switch-off diff.
min. value
winter function setting
max. temp. OUT

The control in output presents a series of parameters in which values to set are not yet instituted in the daily use and
in any case could be different depending on the characteristics of the system.
Having in any ay to set the values to allow the functioning of the units and, with the comfort of experience acquired,
they are individualised for most of them of the values that guarantee in for the greater part of the cases a good
functioning.
The parameters individualised are saved in the default values.
The switch on and switch off times, with the relative differentials, are those that increase or reduce the response of
the unit to the request of the load.
The control entails the possibility of setting different values for the functioning in cooling from that in heating.
Attention must be paid to respecting that the minimum value in cooling function, resulting with the differential of
summer switch-off is always greater than the switch-off limit of the compressors and, that the maximum value in the
functioning in heating, resulting with the differential of winter switch-off is always less than the maximum switch-off
temperature.
The value of the dead zone must be greater by at least a couple of tenths of degrees centigrade f the difference in
temperature that the largest step of the unit (normally a compressor) causes on the difference of the temperature of
the water in output following its activation.
All the values that regard this function can be modified in the branch of the Service templates as, in case of
necessity they the support centres can intervene.
It is useful, if not indispensable, that any variations are agreed with the Blue Box technical office in order to be able
to identify the calibration values that most satisfy the necessities of the various installations.

The control in output presents a series of parameters, whose values to set are not yet rooted in daily use and could,
in any case, differ depending on the characteristics of the system.
Having in any way to set the values to allow the functioning of the units and, with the comfort of experience acquired,
values that for the most part guarantee proper functioning are individualised for most of them.
The parameters identified are saved in the default values.
The switch on and switch off times, with the relative differentials, are those that increase or decrease the response of
the unit to the request of the load.
The control provides the possibility of setting values for functioning in cooling that differ to functioning in heating.
Attention must be paid to respecting the minimum value in operation in cooling, resulting in the differential of
summer switch-off always being greater than the switch-off limit of the compressors and, with the maximum value in

52
functioning in heating, resulting in the differential of winter switch-off always being less than the maximum switch-off
temperature.
The value of the dead zone must be at least a couple of tenths of degrees centigrade higher than the difference in
temperature which the largest step of the unit (normally a compressor) causes on the difference of the water
temperature in output following its activation.
All the values that regard this function can be modified in the Service templates branch as the support centres can
intervene if necessary.
It is useful, if not indispensable, that any variations are agreed with the Blue Box technical office in order to be able
to identify the calibration values that most satisfy the necessities of the various installations.

5.4.8 Forced capacity reduction

In the units that feature two or more compressors per circuit, it is possible to stop one, in particular operational
conditions.
In addition to the cases seen previously, in the case of reaching the high or low pressure limits, the forcing the
splitting can take place by closing a digital input or to limit the absorbed current.
Closing the digital input for forcing the capacity reduction will halt a compressor of each refrigeration circuit.
In the case in which not all the compressors in the refrigeration circuit are switched on, the control will be restricted
to inhibit the start-up of the last of the sequence.
In the case of variation of the load, the control will turn the compressor which will force the halt.
There is a single limitation to the prolonged forcing of the splitting of the refrigeration circuits related to maintaining
the same level of the oil in the compressors as described in the relative paragraph.
It will also be possible to force the splitting with reference to the current absorbed.
In the Maintenance branch, it is possible to set the differential within which the compressor switch-off occurs and the
setting value that limits the maximum current absorbed.
The operation is relatively simple, when the value of the current absorbed reaches the setting set, the control stops a
first compressor, if the value is reached again, a second is stopped and so on. Theoretically it could stop them all,
even if the value of the current absorbed is reduced with stopping the compressors.
Upon reaching the value of the reduced differential setting, the control activates one of the compressors previously
stopped, and more precisely, starts the first stopped. In other words also for the forcing, the rotation of the
compressors will always apply and furthermore the sequence regarding the refrigeration circuits will respect the
splitting setting logic.
The stopping and starting of the compressors, also following their forcing, will respect all the delays provided by anti-
recycling, minimum switch-off and delay between the consecutive insertion of the two compressors.
Moreover, the consecutive stopping and starting of two compressors will always be delayed by at least 20 seconds,
a fixed parameter is not accessible.

5.4.9 Forced switching of the compressors and oil distribution

In order to balance the number of hours of operation of the compressors in the case of reduced load for prolonged
times and balance the level of oil within the compressors when connected in parallel, the control provides its forcing.
A first forcing can be managed with the activation of a compressor when there is no request by the system to start or
stop any compressor for a determined and generally prolonged time.
Starting a compressor brings about the stopping of one of the compressors already in operation after a short period
of time, following the enabled rotation, and therefore the best distribution of the number of hours in operation on all
the compressors.
This forcing is independent from the number of compressors in operation in the unit, but is related to the prolonged
continuation of this condition.
Another forcing can be related to a precise number of compressors in operation for each circuit.
In the first field of the template SERV_36 the number of compressors is set upon passing a ―Tp‖ defined time leads
to the start-up of another compressor.
As in the previous case, with a further compressor, the refrigeration power will be greater than the power required by
the load. Once the ―Tf‖ time has passed, with the active rotation of the compressors, the control will stop one of the
first compressors in operation.
By setting the number of active compressors for forcing at "0", the function is disabled.
A last forcing regards stopping a refrigeration circuit compressor when all the compressors are simultaneously in
operation for the ―Tpc‖ time.

53
In reality the software provides stopping all the compressors except the first of each circuit.
To activate this function it is necessary that the ―AFC‖ parameter of the SERV_36 template is activated by setting it
at ―Yes‖.

5.4.10 Factory programming back-up function

This function allows the recovery of the "factory‖ values of the control set at the time of inspection.

5.4.11 Limited automatic alarm reset

All of the ―serious‖ alarms, regarding the proper operation of the compressors, are reset manually.
For each of these alarms, the control provides the possibility of managing them in automatic reset and limiting the
number of interventions in a determined interval.
The limited automatic reset function can be applied for the individual high and low pressure, gas inlet temperature
and probe breakdown alarms, simultaneously for all the compressors present.
The number of automatic reset alarms and the relative interval are set in the Maintenance branch.
The control automatically resets the alarms, when the conditions that have caused them do not persist, it should be
said, when the pressures or the temperatures fall within the differentials or the value read by the probes falls within
the field of pre—established measurement.
The resetting of the alarms passing from automatic to manual occurs when the set limits are reached.
Manual cancellation of an alarm resets the number of interventions also by the alarms of another type and regarding
other compressors.

5.4.12 Low Charge Operation

This function can be enabled and in any case operates only with the control in input.
In the case that the quantity of water of a system is particularly reduced, in low charge conditions there are in times
surrounding the compressor start-ups and stops.
This function enables the number of inrush currents of the compressors to be reduced, granting minor stress to the
electrical windings, a major cause of their deterioration and consequent energy saving from the minor putting in
operation.
By detecting the operation time, when only one compressor in the unit functions, the control is able to recognise this
critical condition.
Upon verification of this condition, the control increases the unit function differential.
In this way the average value of the water temperature is increased, a condition that does not create problems to the
system considering that request is in any way reduced, it therefore has an increased yield and improves the
operation of the unit.
During low charge operation, the control recalculates the time in low charge, increasing it in proportion to the new
differential.
The calculation occurs with the formula:
Tbc1 = Tbc * diff.bc/diff.
whereby:
Tbc1 = Minimum functioning time during low charge;
Tbc = Minimum functioning time for low charge;
diff.bc = Differential during operation in low charge;
diff = Differential of normal functioning.

The control disables the functioning with the differential at low charge when the compressor operational time is
greater than the minimum operational time during low charge.
the values for managing the function can be set in the Service branch.

5.4.13 Alarm batching

All the alarms managed by the control are subdivided, by uniformity of the groups.
54
A priority bracket can be given to the alarm groups.
By default, all of the alarm groups are in bracket ―1‖ corresponding to maximum importance.
In compatibility with the configuration of the unit, a digital output and therefore a dry contact will correspond for each
bracket.
The possibility of modifying the category bracket of each group of alarms depends on their gravity and is limited
according to the table below.
Passing the alarm activation from one bracket with less priority to another bracket of greater priority can be done
when a number of interventions are reached.
Reported in the table are the groups of alarms, their definition, the bracket to which they can be assigned and the
alarm templates to which they refer.

N° Definition of the group Bracket Alarm reference

01 Pressure switches 1-2 ―ALL_2‖, ―ALL_3‖, ―ALL_116‖.
02 Heat Pumps 1-2 ―ALL_4‖, ―ALL_5‖, ―ALL_141‖, ―ALL_115‖.
03 High pressure 1-2 ―ALL_6‖, ―ALL_7‖, ―ALL_8‖, ―ALL_9‖.
04 Low pressure 1-2 ―ALL_10‖, ―ALL_11‖, ―ALL_12‖, ―ALL_13‖.
05 Heat compressors 1-2 ―ALL_14‖, ―ALL_15‖, ―ALL_16‖, ―ALL_17‖,
―ALL_18‖, ―ALL_19‖, ―ALL_20‖, ―ALL_21‖,
―ALL_22‖, ―ALL_23‖, ―ALL_24‖, ―ALL_25‖,
―ALL_26‖, ―ALL_27‖, ―ALL_28‖, ―ALL_29‖,
―ALL_105‖, ―ALL_106‖, ―ALL_107‖,
―ALL_108‖.
06 Heat ventilators 1-2 ―ALL_30‖, ―ALL_31‖, ―ALL_32‖, ―ALL_33‖,
―ALL_105‖, ―ALL_106‖, ―ALL_107‖,
―ALL_108‖,.
07 Power supply voltage 1-2 ―ALL_34‖, ―ALL_35‖.
08 pLAN connections 1 ―ALL_36‖.
09 Serial and clock options 1-2-3 ―ALL_37‖, ―ALL_38‖.
10 Maintenance signals 1-2-3 ―ALL_39‖, ―ALL_40‖, ―ALL_41‖, ―ALL_42‖,
―ALL_43‖, ―ALL_44‖, ―ALL_45‖, ―ALL_46‖,
―ALL_47‖, ―ALL_48‖, ―ALL_49‖, ―ALL_50‖,
―ALL_51‖, ―ALL_52‖, ―ALL_53‖, ―ALL_54‖,
―ALL_55‖, ―ALL_56‖, ―ALL_57‖, ―ALL_58‖,
―ALL_117‖, ―ALL_142‖.
11 Irregular maintenance signals 1-2-3 ―ALL_59‖, ―ALL_60‖, ―ALL_61‖, ―ALL_62‖,
―ALL_63‖, ―ALL_110‖, ―ALL_111‖,
―ALL_112‖, ―ALL_113‖ , ―ALL_118‖.
12 Water temperature threshold 1-2-3 ―ALL_64‖, ―ALL_65‖, ―ALL_66‖, ―ALL_67‖,
exceeded ―ALL_68‖, ―ALL_69‖, ―ALL_70‖, ―ALL_71‖,
―ALL_72‖, ―ALL_73‖, ―ALL_74‖, ―ALL_75‖,
―ALL_76‖, ―ALL_77‖.
13 Probe breakdowns 1-2 ―ALL_78‖, ―ALL_79‖, ―ALL_80‖, ―ALL_81‖,
―ALL_82‖, ―ALL_83‖, ―ALL_84‖, ―ALL_85‖,
―ALL_86‖, ―ALL_87‖, ―ALL_88‖, ―ALL_89‖,
―ALL_90‖, ―ALL_91‖, ―ALL_92‖, ―ALL_93‖,
―ALL_94‖, ―ALL_95‖, ―ALL_96‖, ―ALL_97‖,
―ALL_98‖, ―ALL_99‖, ―ALL_100‖,
―ALL_101‖, ―ALL_103‖.
14 Inverters and drivers 1-2 ―ALL_109‖, ―ALL_130‖, ―ALL_131‖,
―ALL_132‖, ―ALL_133‖, ―ALL_134‖,
―ALL_135‖, ―ALL_136‖, ―ALL_137‖,
―ALL_138‖, ―ALL_139‖, ―ALL_140‖.
15 Signal settings 1-2 ―ALL_102‖.

The settings regarding the management of the alarm levels can be set in the Maintenance branch.

5.4.14 Management of the alarm sending via GSM modem

Normally the control registers the activation of each alarm by memorising the date, time and event occurred.
The number of events that the control holds in memory is limited to ―150 alarms‖. When the designated space is
filled, the control deletes the less recent in order to record the new alarms.
This function, limited to the recording, can be used to approximately indicate any problems of the unit, but its main
purpose is distance signalling of the alarm occurred.

55
With the activation of an alarm, the control enables an ―SMS‖ message to be sent.
In order for the alarm messages to be sent via "SMS", it is necessary to install the RS232 serial card for modems
3
(see the description of the hardware parts of the pCO system to identify the necessary card), a ―GSM‖ modem
complete with ―SIM‖, to set in the Service branch, the ―modem GSM‖ protocol and the communication speed at
―9600‖ bps.
When all of the operations are performed correctly, a template appears in the ―Maintenance‖ branch that describes
the status of the modem and the presence of field or not.
The template is in Italian when the Italian language is set, otherwise it is in English.
Also in the same ―Maintenance‖ branch but, password protected, are templates for setting the number to the
message is to be sent, the sending methods, and the possibility of inserting a description, to a maximum of 16
characters, that identifies the system.
Cancel the next four lines in the previous version of the manual.

5.4.15 Cyclic and event recording of parameters of functioning of the unit;

The control can record the unit operation to allow a later analysis.
The recordings will therefore constitute a type of "black box" for the unit.
The types of recordings are event and cyclic based.
For event recording, at the moment when a selected variable changes status, the control records a series of
combined function parameters.
For cyclic recordings, at defined intervals, the control periodically records the values of the selected variables.
The control will reserve a portion of memory for each type of recording.
Once the memory reserved for the recording has run out, the control will record over the oldest data.
In each case, the visualisation of the recordings can also occur with the use of the user terminal and the mode is
described in the ―historical Branch‖ chapter.

5.4.16 Control of the yield and unit efficiency

On a Menu branch template, the control displays the percentage of the unit in operation or rather the number of
active compressors.
By means of the operating unit percentage and the temperature difference between the hydraulic circuits input and
output, the control verifies the yield and the operational efficiency.
Verification occurs by comparing the difference between the theoretic and measured temperature of the water.

The verification does not occur instantly but entails with a delay from the last activation or deactivation of a
compressor.
The delay time can be set.
In the case the value obtained by the correct measurement from the coefficient is less than that calculated, once the
set delay is passed, the control will be able to activate a signal.
The signalling, which does not bring about any action on the functioning of the unit, must be activated in the
Maintenance branch.

5.4.17 Compensation of the set point

There can be the functioning conditions of for which it is useful, if not vital, to vary the set point dynamically upon
variation of the conditions outside of the unit.
A complete management can occur by using an analog signal from an external control. In this case it will be the
external control that will send the variation of the second set of the pre-established logics by elaborating the
information.
If the variation of the functioning setting is more simply related simply to the temperature of the air, and therefore
entails compensation, the unit control can manage it.
In this way the compensation will allow the functioning set point to be changed, in proportion to compensation
differential, between two temperature limits.
The compensation can be positive or negative.
When the compensation is positive upon the increase in air temperature, the functioning setting is also increased.
When negative, the air reduces the temperature of the setting upon the increase in air temperature.

56
 Set + dif.le comp.

dif.le comp.

se set

T. aria T. aria

T1 T2 T2 T1
Positive compensation Negative compensation

Cooling function

The parameters to set are therefore a ―T1‖ temperature value to which the value "0" of the differential of
compensation will correspond and "T2" to which the value of the differential of compensation and naturally the
differential of compensation will correspond.
For any other value, including between ―T1‖ and ―T2‖, that the differential of compensation will be comprised
proportionally between "0" and the maximum value.
That described refers to the functioning in cooling.

In regards to the heating, there are always the values ―T1‖ and ―T2‖ and the compensation differential to set. The
setting variation, however, takes place differently to the heating function. At the ―T2‖ temperature the function setting
will correspond to the set value, and the ―T1‖ temperature will be equal to the set value reduced by the compensation
differential.
For intermediary temperature values, the set will reduce proportionally from zero to the maximum value.
In setting of the heating pump unit operation parameters, the different type of compensation can be selected
between cooling and heating.
Also in the heating pump units, as the selection is unique for both functions, if one of the two is not desired, it is
enough to appropriately set the relative parameters.
The temperature compensation must not be enabled with the continuous variation of the set point by analog signal.

5.4.18 Heating pump stop

There are system configurations that grant the possibility to halt the unit pump operation also upon reaching the set
temperature of the setting.
Naturally, construction of the system must provide a pump for the unit water circulation and one or more pumps or
circulation systems for various zones of the system.
In order for the unit to operate correctly, the temperature probe of the reference water must be installed in a tank or
in a part of the hydraulic circuit that can feel the change in the temperature of the water also when the pump or
pumps of the unit are not in operation.
In regards to the operation, upon reaching the set temperature of the setting, the control automatically performs the
switching-off procedure provided with the use of the keyboard with relative delays.
At the same time, upon the increase in the value read by the reference temperature probe, the control automatically
performs the launch procedure provided by the keyboard.
When the unit, and therefore the pump, is stopped due to reaching the set reference water temperature value
setting, ―Unit On‖ appears on the main template of the Menu.
It is vital that the reference water temperature probe is correctly installed.

5.4.19 Putting the cooling plant in operation

Normally the refrigeration units are sized to function at nominal conditions.
In reality, it may transpire that the units must functions at conditions greatly different to nominal conditions for short
periods, particularly at the time of the launching the system during the summer period.
In the absence of particular hydraulic adjustments, very often the refrigeration units risk being halted by high
pressure alarms.

57
To this end, in the units equipped with three pumps, when the temperature of the water is higher than the maximum
summer limit the unit with only two pumps starts automatically.
In this way, by reducing the water flow rate the evaporation pressure is also reduced and, consequently, the inlet
pressure avoiding the intervention of protective measures.
It is, however, the function for which upon reaching the hp 1 value, when all the compressors of the refrigeration
circuit are in operation, the control stops one or, if one is not in operation, it prevents the start-up.
The functioning at full capacity and therefore starting the third pump automatically occurs when the temperature of
the reference water is lowered by 3°C in relation to the intervention limit.

5.4.20 Winter functioning limit and integrative heating

It is known that the efficiency reduces with the decrease in the external air temperature in the heat pump air-water
units, during heating operation.
The reduction in the efficiency during the unit heat pump operation can be such that the heat produced is not enough
for the heating.
Furthermore, the external air can further reduce until the unit operation limit is reached, which necessitates the unit
being switched off.
The control can automatically stop the operation of the heating unit, when the temperature of the external air reaches
the imposed operation limit.
In reality, only the operation of the compressors is stopped, while the water circulation pumps will be kept in
operation if they are also managed.
Re-starting the heat production occurs automatically when the air temperature exceeds the limit by two degrees.
If the unit provides the management of heating integration, by means of electrical heating resistance, a digital output
is available on the control that activates it when the temperature of the external air reaches the relative value
imposed.
The operation limit setting is always less than the activation value of the heating integration.
These functions, combined with the compensation of the external air setting, can enable interesting management for
the operation economy of the heating system by the unit control.

5.4.21 Limited manual cancellation of the alarms

The function provides the limitation of the possibility of cancelling the alarms manually.
Some alarms are automatic reset for a limited time, after which become of manual restoration. Others must be
cancelled manually after the first intervention, and the signals are also included in the alarm templates which must
also be cancelled manually in some cases.
The cancellation of all these templates and the re-starting of the unit take place by pressing the ―alarm‖ key when the
causes that have generated them no longer apply.
The repeated manual cancellation of the alarms with the restoration of the unit function, without removing the cause
that has generated them, can seriously compromise the integrity of the unit components.
Through this function, the alarms can be cancelled manually a limited number of times within a determined period of
time.
In the case in which the number of times provided in the set period of time is reached, the manual cancellation of the
alarms is blocked and can only be unblocked in password protected ―alarms‖ branch.
In the case that the manual cancellation of the alarms is blocked, pressing the ―alarm‖ key brings up a template
requesting that you call the Blue Service support centre.
The ―alarms‖ branch can be accessed from the ―alarms‖ menu.
After having inserted the correct password the templates appear in groups of three that report the templates for
which manual cancellation of the alarms is no longer possible.
The ―resets‖ of the block must be performed for the individual alarms.
In the even of ―black out‖ electricity failures, the status of the alarms that cannot be cancelled manually are kept
unaltered, but require an intervention in the password protected branch.

5.4.22 Second parameter settings for condensation control

The condensation air units can be equipped with the ventilator speed control to keep the condensation pressure
constant during the operation of the compressors, independently of the value of the air temperature and therefore to
allow the compressor functioning to be optimised.
Reduction in air speed also leads to the reduction in the noise of the unit.

58
Essentially, the purpose of using the condensation control is to considerably reduce the ventilator speed when the
temperature of the air drops below fifteen degrees, which means that it is limited to the units that operate to condition
for very limited periods.
There can be installations for which, during particular times of the day, the reduction in the unit noise can take on a
greater importance of the optimal function of the compressors.
The software provides the possibility to activate a second set of values, the control of the ventilator speed that can
be used to considerably reduce the noise of the unit.
With the presence of the second set of values for controlling the ventilator speed, the activation occurs automatically
for predefined time brackets and days of the week.
There is a possibility of having two time brackets for operation with the normal set of parameters and the remaining
part of the day with the second set of parameters.
Therefore, a reduction in noise can be used, during the nocturnal hours and throughout the day, for example in the
afternoon.

2nd set

1st set

Start Start Start Start

1st set 2nd set 1st set 2nd set
00.00 24.00
Example of time bracket during the day

If the use of the time bracket is not necessary during the daytime, it is sufficient to set the start time of the next first
set of parameters a minute after the start of the second.
The second set of parameters for controlling the ventilator speed is provided during the cold water production by the
refrigeration unit.
The second set of parameters can also be activated in the heat pump units, but only during the cold water
production.
Setting the values of the second set of parameters is done in the service branch.
The start time of the two different sets of parameters in the day and the days of the week that it must be active for is
made in the time branch.

59
6 I/O

6.1.1 General information

As already mentioned previously the software can manage diverse combinations of hardware cards that refer to
various constructive types of refrigeration units and to diverse function methods.
Selecting the constructive type and therefore the type and number of cards that the programme manages occurs
automatically following their programming.
According to the various functions and the type of card, the functions carried out by the inputs and the digital and
analog outputs; reported below are the functions carried out by the digital and analog inputs and outputs upon a
change in type of card and the functions carried out.
To more easily identify the references between the type of unit and the functions of the inputs and outputs, the
divisions have been made in the first place for the number of refrigeration circuits and, therefore, for functions
performed.

Configuration 1A (from 1 to 4 compressors and 1 refrigeration circuit)

This configuration entails the use of a Large card.
Some functions are not available in this configuration.

Configuration 2A (2, 4 and 6 compressors and 2 refrigeration circuits)

This configuration entails the use of a Large card in operation by master and an expansion card that will be a
Medium in the configuration with the maximum options.

Configuration 2B (8 compressors and 2 refrigeration circuits)

This configuration entails the use of a Large card in function as master and of an expansion card that can be a Large
card in the configuration with the maximum of the options.

Configuration 3A (3, 6 and 9 compressors and 3 refrigeration circuits)

This configuration entails the use of a Large card functioning as master and of another Large card functioning as
slave card.

Configuration 3B (12 compressors and 3 refrigeration circuits)

This configuration entails the use of a Large card functioning as master and of another Large card functioning as
slave. In regards to the previous, with the presence of an extra compressor per circuit, there is a configuration of the
inputs and outputs.

Configuration 4A (4, 8 and 12 compressors and 4 refrigerator circuits)

This configuration entails the use of a Large card functioning as master; of another Large card functioning as slave
and of an expansion card for particular configurations and options that will be a slave card.

Configuration 4B (16 compressors and 4 refrigerator circuits)

This configuration provides the use of a Large card functioning as master; of another Large card functioning as slave
and of an expansion card for particular configurations and options that will be a slave card.

In some inputs and outputs of the various configurations there are the initials which mean:

(hp) Heat pump (cp) Set point compensation

(fc) Free cooling (ww) Water condenser
(fce) Free external cooling (inv) Compressor with inverter
Free external cooling with hydraulic The function is present as an alternative to
(fcd) (o)
decoupler the precedent
(ds) Double set point (e) The function is present with the precedent
(rc) Heat recovery (amp) Absorbed current limitation

60
6.2 List of inputs and outputs
Below is shown the list of inputs and outputs and their function, for each configuration.

6.2.1 Configuration ―1A‖

Configuration for the units with 1 to 4 compressors in a single cooling circuit.

Master card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small High pressure
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small Low Pressure
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small Reference water temperature
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small User outlet temperature
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small Coil temperature at defrosting completed (hp)
Plant return water temperature (fc or fce or fcd)
Waste water outlet temperature (ww and hp)
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small Condensation control
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small Free cooling valve (fc or fce)
Free cooling pump (fcd)
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small Recovery water valve control (rc)
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small Inverter (inv)
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small External interlock
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small User circuit water flow switch
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Supply control
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Summer/winter switch (hp)
High/low set point switch (ds)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Pump 1 thermal breaker
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Pump 2 thermal breaker
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small Pump 3 thermal breaker
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Fan thermal breaker
Waste water flow switch (ww or hp)
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium Air temperature (hp or fc or fce or fcd or cp)
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium Recovery water inlet temperature (rc)
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium Variable set point
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium Compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium Compressor 2 thermal breaker
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium Compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium Compressor 4 thermal breaker
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium Pressure switches
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium On/off recovery (rc)
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
61
Term. Name Description Card Function
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Compressor 1
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Compressor 2
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Compressor 3
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Fans
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Pump 1
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Pump 2
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Compressor 4
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small General alarm (level 1)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium Pump 3
General alarm (level 2)
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium 4-way valve (hp)
Condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
Fans 1 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium Summer/winter switch (hp)
Condenser coil 3/5 (fc)
Fans 2 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium Evaporator antifreeze heater
Thermostatic valve change (ds)
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium Reverse ventilation (hp)
Free cooling valve (fc or fce)
Free cooling pump (fcp)
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium
J19-1 ID15H Digital IN 15,230V Large
J19-2 ID15 IN digital 15 24V Large Forced capacity reduction
J19-3 ID15C Common digital IN 15 and Large
16
J19-4 ID16 IN digital 16 24V Large External free cooling fan thermal breaker (fce or fcd)
Inverter alarm (inv)
J19-5 ID16H Digital IN 16,230V Large
J20-1 Y5 Analog output 5 Large Free cooling fan
J20-2 Y6 Analog output 6 Large
J20-3 B9 IN passive analog 9 Large
J20-4 BC9 Common inlet Large
analog 9
J20-5 B10 IN passive analog 10 Large
J20-6 BC10 Common inlet Large
analog 10
J20-7 ID17 IN digital 17 24V Large Free cooling pump thermal breaker (fcd)
J20-8 ID18 IN digital 18 24V Large Free cooling flow switch (fcd)
J20-9 IDC17 Common digital IN 17 and Large
18
J21-1 NO14 Relay 14 NO contact Large Recovery valve (rc)
General alarm (level 3)

62
Term. Name Description Card Function
J21-2 C14 Common relay 14 Large
J21-3 NC14 Relay 14 NC contact Large
J21-4 NO15 Relay 15 NO contact Large Gas discharge valve (rc)
J21-5 C15 Common relay 15 Large
J21-6 NC15 Relay 15 NC contact Large
J22-1 C16 Common relay 16, 17 and Large
18
J22-2 NO16 Relay 16 NO contact Large Auxiliary heating (hp)
J22-3 NO17 Relay 17 NO contact Large
J22-4 NO18 Relay 18 NO contact Large
J22-5 C16 Common relay 16.17 and Large
18
J23-1 E- RS485 connection Large
J23-2 E+ RS485 connection Large
J23-3 GND RS485 connection Large

63
6.2.2 Configuration ―2A‖
Configuration for units comprising 2, 4 or 6 compressors in two cooling circuits.

Master card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small High pressure circuit 1
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small Low pressure circuit 1
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small Reference water temperature
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small (0) User outlet temperature
User 1 outlet temperature
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small Coil temperature at circuit 1 defrosting completed (hp)
Plant return water temperature (fc or fce or fcd)
Circuit 1 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small Circuit 1 condensation control
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small Free cooling valve (fc or fce)
Free cooling pump (fcd)
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small Recovery water valve control (rc)
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small Circuit 2 condensation control
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small External interlock
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small User circuit water flow switch
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Supply control
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Summer/winter switch (hp)
High/low set point switch (ds)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Pump 1 thermal breaker
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Pump 2 thermal breaker
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small Pump 3 thermal breaker
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Circuit 1 fan thermal breaker
Waste water flow switch (ww or hp)
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium High pressure circuit 2
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium Low pressure circuit 2
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium User 2 outlet temperature
(1) Variable set point
(1) Recovery water inlet temperature (rc)
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium Circuit 2 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium Circuit 3 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium Circuit 1 pressure switches
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium Circuit 2 pressure switches
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small

64
Term. Name Description Card Function
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Circuit 1 compressor 1
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Circuit 2 compressor 1
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Circuit 3 compressor 1
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Circuit 1 fans
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Pump 1
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Pump 2
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Pump 3
(2) General alarm (level 2)
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small General alarm (level 1)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium Circuit 1 compressor 2
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium Circuit 2 compressor 2
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium Circuit 3 compressor 2
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium Evaporator antifreeze heater
Thermostatic valve change (ds)
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium Circuit 1 reverse ventilation (hp)
Free cooling valve (fc or fce)
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium
J19-1 ID15H Digital IN 15,230V Large
J19-2 ID15 IN digital 15 24V Large Circuit 2 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J19-3 ID15C Common digital IN 15 and Large
16
J19-4 ID16 IN digital 16 24V Large Circuit 3 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J19-5 ID16H Digital IN 16,230V Large
J20-1 Y5 Analog output 5 Large Free cooling fan
J20-2 Y6 Analog output 6 Large Inverter (inv)
J20-3 B9 IN passive analog 9 Large Coil temperature at circuit 2 defrosting completed (hp)
Circuit 2 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J20-4 BC9 Common inlet Large
analog 9
J20-5 B10 IN passive analog 10 Large Air temperature (hp or fc or fce or fcd or cp)
J20-6 BC10 Common inlet Large
analog 10
J20-7 ID17 IN digital 17 24V Large On/off recovery (rc)
J20-8 ID18 IN digital 18 24V Large Circuit 2 fan thermal breaker
J20-9 IDC17 Common digital IN 17 and Large
18
J21-1 NO14 Relay 14 NO contact Large Circuit 2 reverse ventilation (hp)
Circuit 1 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J21-2 C14 Common relay 14 Large
J21-3 NC14 Relay 14 NC contact Large
J21-4 NO15 Relay 15 NO contact Large Circuit 1 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 1 condenser coil 3/5 (fc)

65
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J21-5 C15 Common relay 15 Large
J21-6 NC15 Relay 15 NC contact Large
J22-1 C16 Common relay 16, 17 and Large
18
J22-2 NO16 Relay 16 NO contact Large Circuit 2 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 2 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J22-3 NO17 Relay 17 NO contact Large Summer/winter switch (hp)
Circuit 2 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J22-4 NO18 Relay 18 NO contact Large Circuit 2 fans
J22-5 C16 Common relay 16.17 and Large
18
J23-1 E- RS485 connection Large
J23-2 E+ RS485 connection Large
J23-3 GND RS485 connection Large

Expansion card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small (1) Variable set point
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small (1) Recovery water inlet temperature (rc)
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 1 (fce or
fcd)
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 2 (fce or
fcd)
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 3 (fce or
fcd)
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 4 (fce or
fcd)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Free cooling pump thermal breaker (fcd)
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Free cooling flow switch (fcd)
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small Inverter alarm (inv)
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Forced capacity reduction
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium

66
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Fans 1 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
Auxiliary heating (hp)
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Fans 2 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Fans 3 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Fans 4 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
(2) General alarm (level 2)
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Free cooling pump (fcp)
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Recovery valve (rc)
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Circuit 1 gas discharge valve (rc)
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small Circuit 2 gas discharge valve (rc)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium (2) General alarm (level 2)
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium General alarm (level 3)
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium

Notes:
(0) Input to be used with a single hydraulic circuit.
(1) Use B8 with one hydraulic circuit and without the other accessory or the slave B3 and B4 inlets.
(2) Use the digital output NO7 when the pump 3 is not present or the NO8 of the expansion card if the fourth free
cooling fan group is not present or the NO9.

67
6.2.3 Configuration ―2B‖
Configuration for the units composed of 8 compressors in two cooling circuits.

Master card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small High pressure circuit 1
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small Low pressure circuit 1
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small Reference water temperature
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small (0) User outlet temperature
User 1 outlet temperature
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small Coil temperature at circuit 1 defrosting completed (hp)
Plant return water temperature (fc or fce or fcd)
Circuit 1 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small Circuit 1 condensation control
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small Free cooling valve (fc or fce)
Free cooling pump (fcd)
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small Recovery water valve control (rc)
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small Circuit 2 condensation control
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small External interlock
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small User circuit water flow switch
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Supply control
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Summer/winter switch (hp)
High/low set point switch (ds)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Pump 1 thermal breaker
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Pump 2 thermal breaker
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small Pump 3 thermal breaker
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Circuit 1 fan thermal breaker
Waste water flow switch (ww or hp)
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium High pressure circuit 2
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium Low pressure circuit 2
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium User 2 outlet temperature
(1) Variable set point
(1) Recovery water inlet temperature (rc)
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium Circuit 2 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium Circuit 3 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium Circuit 4 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium Circuit 1 pressure switches
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium Circuit 2 pressure switches
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small

68
Term. Name Description Card Function
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Circuit 1 compressor 1
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Circuit 2 compressor 1
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Circuit 3 compressor 1
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Circuit 1 fans
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Pump 1
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Pump 2
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Circuit 4 compressor 1
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small General alarm (level 1)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium Circuit 1 compressor 2
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium Circuit 2 compressor 2
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium Circuit 3 compressor 2
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium Circuit 4 compressor 2
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium Pump 3
(2) General alarm (level 2)
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium
J19-1 ID15H Digital IN 15,230V Large
J19-2 ID15 IN digital 15 24V Large Circuit 1 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J19-3 ID15C Common digital IN 15 and Large
16
J19-4 ID16 IN digital 16 24V Large Circuit 2 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J19-5 ID16H Digital IN 16,230V Large
J20-1 Y5 Analog output 5 Large Free cooling fan
J20-2 Y6 Analog output 6 Large Inverter (inv)
J20-3 B9 IN passive analog 9 Large Coil temperature at circuit 2 defrosting completed (hp)
Circuit 2 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J20-4 BC9 Common inlet Large
analog 9
J20-5 B10 IN passive analog 10 Large Air temperature (hp or fc or fce or fcd or cp)
J20-6 BC10 Common inlet Large
analog 10
J20-7 ID17 IN digital 17 24V Large Circuit 3 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J20-8 ID18 IN digital 18 24V Large Circuit 4 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J20-9 IDC17 Common digital IN 17 and Large
18
J21-1 NO14 Relay 14 NO contact Large Evaporator antifreeze heater
Thermostatic valve change (ds)
J21-2 C14 Common relay 14 Large
J21-3 NC14 Relay 14 NC contact Large
J21-4 NO15 Relay 15 NO contact Large Circuit 1 4-way valve (hp)
J21-5 C15 Common relay 15 Large
J21-6 NC15 Relay 15 NC contact Large

69
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J22-1 C16 Common relay 16, 17 and Large
18
J22-2 NO16 Relay 16 NO contact Large Circuit 2 4-way valve (hp)
J22-3 NO17 Relay 17 NO contact Large Summer/winter switch (hp)
J22-4 NO18 Relay 18 NO contact Large Circuit 2 fans
J22-5 C16 Common relay 16.17 and Large
18
J23-1 E- RS485 connection Large
J23-2 E+ RS485 connection Large
J23-3 GND RS485 connection Large

Expansion card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small Amp current transformer (amp)
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small (1) Variable set point
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small (1) Recovery water inlet temperature (rc)
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 1 (fce or
fcd)
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 2 (fce or
fcd)
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 3 (fce or
fcd)
(4) On/off recovery (rc)
(4) Inverter alarm (inv)
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 4 (fce or
fcd)
(4) On/off recovery (rc)
(4) Inverter alarm (inv)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Free cooling pump thermal breaker (fcd)
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Free cooling flow switch (fcd)
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small Forced capacity reduction
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Circuit 2 fan thermal breaker
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium

70
Term. Name Description Card Function
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Fans 1 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
Auxiliary heating (hp)
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Fans 2 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Fans 3 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Fans 4 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
(2) General alarm (level 2)
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Free cooling pump (fcp)
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Recovery valve (rc)
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Circuit 1 gas discharge valve (rc)
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small Circuit 2 gas discharge valve (rc)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium Circuit 1 reverse ventilation (hp)
Free cooling valve (fc or fcd)
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium Circuit 2 reverse ventilation (hp)
Circuit 1 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium Circuit 1 condenser coil 3/5 (fc)
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium Circuit 2 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium Circuit 2 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium
J19-1 ID15H Digital IN 15,230V Large
J19-2 ID15 IN digital 15 24V Large
J19-3 ID15C Common digital IN 15 and Large
16
J19-4 ID16 IN digital 16 24V Large
J19-5 ID16H Digital IN 16,230V Large
J20-1 Y5 Analog output 5 Large
J20-2 Y6 Analog output 6 Large
J20-3 B9 IN passive analog 9 Large
J20-4 BC9 Common inlet Large
analog 9
J20-5 B10 IN passive analog 10 Large
71
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J20-6 BC10 Common inlet Large
analog 10
J20-7 ID17 IN digital 17 24V Large
J20-8 ID18 IN digital 18 24V Large
J20-9 IDC17 Common digital IN 17 and Large
18
J21-1 NO14 Relay 14 NO contact Large General alarm (level 3)
J21-2 C14 Common relay 14 Large
J21-3 NC14 Relay 14 NC contact Large
J21-4 NO15 Relay 15 NO contact Large
J21-5 C15 Common relay 15 Large
J21-6 NC15 Relay 15 NC contact Large
J22-1 C16 Common relay 16, 17 and Large
18
J22-2 NO16 Relay 16 NO contact Large
J22-3 NO17 Relay 17 NO contact Large
J22-4 NO18 Relay 18 NO contact Large
J22-5 C16 Common relay 16.17 and Large
18
J23-1 E- RS485 connection Large
J23-2 E+ RS485 connection Large
J23-3 GND RS485 connection Large

Notes:
(0) Input to be used with a single hydraulic circuit.
(1) Use B8 with one hydraulic circuit and without the other accessory or the slave B3 and B4 inlets.
(2) Use the digital output NO13 if the pump 3 is not present or the NO4 of the expansion card instead of the fourth
group of external free cooling fans.

72
6.2.4 Configuration ―3A‖
Configuration for units comprising 3, 6 or 9 compressors in three cooling circuits.

Master card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small High pressure circuit 1
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small Low pressure circuit 1
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small Reference water temperature
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small User 1 outlet temperature
(1) Master unit user outlet temperature
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small Coil temperature at circuit 1 defrosting completed (hp)
Plant return water temperature (fc or fce or fcd)
Circuit 1 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small Circuit 1 condensation control
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small Free cooling valve (fc or fce)
Free cooling pump (fcd)
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small Recovery water valve control (rc)
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small Circuit 2 condensation control
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small External interlock
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small User circuit water flow switch
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Supply control
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Summer/winter switch (hp)
High/low set point switch (ds)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Pump 1 thermal breaker
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Pump 2 thermal breaker
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small Pump 3 thermal breaker
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Circuit 1 fan thermal breaker
Waste water flow switch (ww or hp)
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium High pressure circuit 2
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium Low pressure circuit 2
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium (1) User 2 outlet temperature
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium Circuit 2 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium Circuit 3 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium Circuit 1 pressure switches
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium Circuit 2 pressure switches
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small

73
Term. Name Description Card Function
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Circuit 1 compressor 1
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Circuit 2 compressor 1
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Circuit 3 compressor 1
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Circuit 1 fans
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Pump 1
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Pump 2
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Pump 3
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small General alarm (level 1)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium Circuit 1 compressor 2
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium Circuit 2 compressor 2
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium Circuit 3 compressor 2
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium Evaporator antifreeze heater
Thermostatic valve change (ds)
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium Circuit 1 reverse ventilation (hp)
Free cooling valve (fc or fce)
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium
J19-1 ID15H Digital IN 15,230V Large
J19-2 ID15 IN digital 15 24V Large Circuit 2 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J19-3 ID15C Common digital IN 15 and Large
16
J19-4 ID16 IN digital 16 24V Large Circuit 3 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J19-5 ID16H Digital IN 16,230V Large
J20-1 Y5 Analog output 5 Large Free cooling fan
J20-2 Y6 Analog output 6 Large Inverter (inv)
J20-3 B9 IN passive analog 9 Large Coil temperature at circuit 2 defrosting completed (hp)
Circuit 2 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J20-4 BC9 Common inlet Large
analog 9
J20-5 B10 IN passive analog 10 Large Air temperature (hp or fc or fce or fcd or cp)
J20-6 BC10 Common inlet Large
analog 10
J20-7 ID17 IN digital 17 24V Large On/off recovery (rc)
J20-8 ID18 IN digital 18 24V Large Circuit 2 fan thermal breaker
J20-9 IDC17 Common digital IN 17 and Large
18
J21-1 NO14 Relay 14 NO contact Large Circuit 2 reverse ventilation (hp)
Circuit 1 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J21-2 C14 Common relay 14 Large
J21-3 NC14 Relay 14 NC contact Large
J21-4 NO15 Relay 15 NO contact Large Circuit 1 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 1 condenser coil 3/5 (fc)
J21-5 C15 Common relay 15 Large
J21-6 NC15 Relay 15 NC contact Large
J22-1 C16 Common relay 16, 17 and Large
18

74
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J22-2 NO16 Relay 16 NO contact Large Circuit 2 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 2 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J22-3 NO17 Relay 17 NO contact Large Summer/winter switch (hp)
Circuit 2 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J22-4 NO18 Relay 18 NO contact Large Circuit 2 fans
J22-5 C16 Common relay 16.17 and Large
18
J23-1 E- RS485 connection Large
J23-2 E+ RS485 connection Large
J23-3 GND RS485 connection Large

Slave card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small High pressure circuit 3
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small Low pressure circuit 3
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small Variable set point
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small (1) Slave unit user outlet temperature
(1) User 3 outlet temperature
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small Coil temperature at circuit 3 defrosting completed (hp)
Circuit 3 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small Circuit 3 condensation control
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 1 (fce or
fcd)
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 2 (fce or
fcd)
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 3 (fce or
fcd)
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 4 (fce or
fcd)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Free cooling pump thermal breaker (fcd)
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Free cooling flow switch (fcd)
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small Inverter alarm (inv)
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Circuit 3 fan thermal breaker
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium Amp current transformer (amp)
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium Recovery water inlet temperature
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium Circuit 2 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium Circuit 3 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium Forced capacity reduction
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium Circuit 3 pressure switches
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium

75
Term. Name Description Card Function
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Circuit 1 compressor 3
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Circuit 2 compressor 3
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Circuit 3 compressor 3
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Circuit 3 fans
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Fans 1 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
(2) Circuit 1 gas discharge valve (rc)
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Fans 2 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
(2) Circuit 2 gas discharge valve (rc)
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Fans 3 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
(2) Circuit 3 gas discharge valve (rc)
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small Fans 4 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
General alarm (level 2)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium Free cooling pump (fcd)
Auxiliary heating (hp)
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium Circuit 3 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 3 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
(2) Circuit 1 gas discharge valve (rc)
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium Circuit 3 reverse ventilation (hp)
Circuit 3 condenser coil 3/5 (fc)
(2) Circuit 2 gas discharge valve (rc)
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium (2) Circuit 3 gas discharge valve (rc)
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium Recovery valve (rc)
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium
J19-1 ID15H Digital IN 15,230V Large
J19-2 ID15 IN digital 15 24V Large
J19-3 ID15C Common digital IN 15 and Large
16
J19-4 ID16 IN digital 16 24V Large
J19-5 ID16H Digital IN 16,230V Large
J20-1 Y5 Analog output 5 Large Free cooling fan
J20-2 Y6 Analog output 6 Large
J20-3 B9 IN passive analog 9 Large
J20-4 BC9 Common inlet Large
analog 9
J20-5 B10 IN passive analog 10 Large
J20-6 BC10 Common inlet Large
analog 10

76
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J20-7 ID17 IN digital 17 24V Large
J20-8 ID18 IN digital 18 24V Large
J20-9 IDC17 Common digital IN 17 and Large
18
J21-1 NO14 Relay 14 NO contact Large General alarm (level 3)
J21-2 C14 Common relay 14 Large
J21-3 NC14 Relay 14 NC contact Large
J21-4 NO15 Relay 15 NO contact Large
J21-5 C15 Common relay 15 Large
J21-6 NC15 Relay 15 NC contact Large
J22-1 C16 Common relay 16, 17 and Large
18
J22-2 NO16 Relay 16 NO contact Large
J22-3 NO17 Relay 17 NO contact Large
J22-4 NO18 Relay 18 NO contact Large
J22-5 C16 Common relay 16.17 and Large
18
J23-1 E- RS485 connection Large
J23-2 E+ RS485 connection Large
J23-3 GND RS485 connection Large

Notes:
(1) With 3 hydraulic circuits, there are 3 user probes: B4 and B8 on the master and B4 on the slave; With 2
hydraulic circuits there are 2 B4 master probes for the circuits 1 and 2 and B4 slave for circuit 3.
(2) The outputs for the condenser coil gas discharge depend, for every circuit, on the presence of the free cooling
or external free cooling with decoupling circuit; If there is no free cooling, the outputs used are NO5, NO6 and
NO7.

77
6.2.5 Configuration ―3B‖
Configuration for the units composed of 12 compressors in three cooling circuits.

Master card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small High pressure circuit 1
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small Low pressure circuit 1
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small Reference water temperature
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small User 1 outlet temperature
(1) Master unit user outlet temperature
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small Coil temperature at circuit 1 defrosting completed (hp)
Plant return water temperature (fc or fce or fcd)
Circuit 1 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small Circuit 1 condensation control
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small Free cooling valve (fc or fce)
Free cooling pump (fcd)
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small Recovery water valve control (rc)
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small Circuit 2 condensation control
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small External interlock
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small User circuit water flow switch
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Supply control
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Summer/winter switch (hp)
High/low set point switch (ds)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Pump 1 thermal breaker
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Pump 2 thermal breaker
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small Pump 3 thermal breaker
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Circuit 1 fan thermal breaker
Waste water flow switch (ww or hp)
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium High pressure circuit 2
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium Low pressure circuit 2
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium (1) User 2 outlet temperature
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium Circuit 2 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium Circuit 3 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium Circuit 4 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium Circuit 1 pressure switches
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium Circuit 2 pressure switches
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small

78
Term. Name Description Card Function
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Circuit 1 compressor 1
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Circuit 2 compressor 1
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Circuit 3 compressor 1
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Circuit 1 fans
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Pump 1
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Pump 2
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Circuit 4 compressor 1
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small General alarm (level 1)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium Circuit 1 compressor 2
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium Circuit 2 compressor 2
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium Circuit 3 compressor 2
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium Circuit 4 compressor 2
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium Pump 3
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium
J19-1 ID15H Digital IN 15,230V Large
J19-2 ID15 IN digital 15 24V Large Circuit 1 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J19-3 ID15C Common digital IN 15 and Large
16
J19-4 ID16 IN digital 16 24V Large Circuit 2 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J19-5 ID16H Digital IN 16,230V Large
J20-1 Y5 Analog output 5 Large Free cooling fan
J20-2 Y6 Analog output 6 Large Inverter (inv)
J20-3 B9 IN passive analog 9 Large Coil temperature at circuit 2 defrosting completed (hp)
Circuit 2 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J20-4 BC9 Common inlet Large
analog 9
J20-5 B10 IN passive analog 10 Large Air temperature (hp or fc or fce or fcd or cp)
J20-6 BC10 Common inlet Large
analog 10
J20-7 ID17 IN digital 17 24V Large Circuit 3 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J20-8 ID18 IN digital 18 24V Large Circuit 4 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J20-9 IDC17 Common digital IN 17 and Large
18
J21-1 NO14 Relay 14 NO contact Large Evaporator antifreeze heater
Thermostatic valve change (ds)
J21-2 C14 Common relay 14 Large
J21-3 NC14 Relay 14 NC contact Large
J21-4 NO15 Relay 15 NO contact Large Circuit 1 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 1 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J21-5 C15 Common relay 15 Large
J21-6 NC15 Relay 15 NC contact Large
J22-1 C16 Common relay 16, 17 and Large
18
J22-2 NO16 Relay 16 NO contact Large Circuit 2 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 2 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)

79
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J22-3 NO17 Relay 17 NO contact Large Summer/winter switch (hp)
J22-4 NO18 Relay 18 NO contact Large Circuit 2 fans
J22-5 C16 Common relay 16.17 and Large
18
J23-1 E- RS485 connection Large
J23-2 E+ RS485 connection Large
J23-3 GND RS485 connection Large

Slave card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small High pressure circuit 3
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small Low pressure circuit 3
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small Variable set point
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small (1) Slave unit user outlet temperature
(1) User 3 outlet temperature
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small Coil temperature at circuit 3 defrosting completed (hp)
Circuit 3 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small Circuit 3 condensation control
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 1 (fce or
fcd)
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 2 (fce or
fcd)
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 3 (fce or
fcd)
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 4 (fce or
fcd)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Free cooling pump thermal breaker (fcd)
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Free cooling flow switch (fcd)
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small Inverter alarm (inv)
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Circuit 3 fan thermal breaker
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium Amp current transformer (amp)
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium Recovery water inlet temperature
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium Circuit 2 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium Circuit 3 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium Circuit 4 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium Circuit 3 pressure switches
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium

80
Term. Name Description Card Function
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Circuit 1 compressor 3
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Circuit 2 compressor 3
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Circuit 3 compressor 3
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Circuit 4 compressor 3
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Circuit 3 fans
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Circuit 1 reverse ventilation (hp)
Fans 1 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
Circuit 1 condenser coil 3/5 (fc)
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Circuit 2 reverse ventilation (hp)
Fans 2 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
Circuit 2 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small Circuit 3 reverse ventilation (hp)
Fans 3 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
Circuit 3 condenser coil 3/5 (fc)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium Fans 4 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
Auxiliary heating (hp)
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium Circuit 3 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 3 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium Circuit 1 gas discharge valve (rc)
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium Circuit 2 gas discharge valve (rc)
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium Circuit 3 gas discharge valve (rc)
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium
J19-1 ID15H Digital IN 15,230V Large
J19-2 ID15 IN digital 15 24V Large
J19-3 ID15C Common digital IN 15 and Large
16
J19-4 ID16 IN digital 16 24V Large Forced capacity reduction
J19-5 ID16H Digital IN 16,230V Large
J20-1 Y5 Analog output 5 Large Free cooling fan
J20-2 Y6 Analog output 6 Large
J20-3 B9 IN passive analog 9 Large
J20-4 BC9 Common inlet Large
analog 9
J20-5 B10 IN passive analog 10 Large
J20-6 BC10 Common inlet Large
analog 10
J20-7 ID17 IN digital 17 24V Large On/off recovery (rc)
J20-8 ID18 IN digital 18 24V Large Circuit 2 fan thermal breaker
J20-9 IDC17 Common digital IN 17 and Large
18
81
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J21-1 NO14 Relay 14 NO contact Large Recovery valve (rc)
J21-2 C14 Common relay 14 Large
J21-3 NC14 Relay 14 NC contact Large
J21-4 NO15 Relay 15 NO contact Large General alarm (level 3)
J21-5 C15 Common relay 15 Large
J21-6 NC15 Relay 15 NC contact Large
J22-1 C16 Common relay 16, 17 and Large
18
J22-2 NO16 Relay 16 NO contact Large Free cooling pump (fcd)
J22-3 NO17 Relay 17 NO contact Large Free cooling valve (fc or fcd)
J22-4 NO18 Relay 18 NO contact Large General alarm (level 2)
J22-5 C16 Common relay 16.17 and Large
18
J23-1 E- RS485 connection Large
J23-2 E+ RS485 connection Large
J23-3 GND RS485 connection Large

Notes:
(1) With 3 hydraulic circuits, there are 3 user probes: B4 and B8 on the master and B4 on the slave; With 2
hydraulic circuits there are 2 B4 master probes for the circuits 1 and 2 and B4 slave for circuit 3.

82
6.2.6 Configuration ―4A‖
Configuration for the units composed of 8 to 12 compressors in four cooling circuits.

Master card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small High pressure circuit 1
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small Low pressure circuit 1
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small Reference water temperature
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small User 1 outlet temperature
(0) Master user outlet temperature
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small Coil temperature at circuit 1 defrosting completed (hp)
Plant return water temperature (fc or fce or fcd)
Circuit 1 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small Circuit 1 condensation control
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small Free cooling valve (fc or fce)
Free cooling pump (fcd)
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small Recovery water valve control (rc)
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small Circuit 2 condensation control
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small External interlock
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small User circuit water flow switch
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Supply control
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Summer/winter switch (hp)
High/low set point switch (ds)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Pump 1 thermal breaker
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Pump 2 thermal breaker
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small Pump 3 thermal breaker
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Circuit 1 fan thermal breaker
Waste water flow switch (ww or hp)
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium High pressure circuit 2
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium Low pressure circuit 2
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium (0) User 2 outlet temperature
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium Circuit 2 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium Circuit 3 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium Circuit 1 pressure switches
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium Circuit 2 pressure switches
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small

83
Term. Name Description Card Function
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Circuit 1 compressor 1
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Circuit 2 compressor 1
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Circuit 3 compressor 1
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Circuit 1 fans
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Pump 1
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Pump 2
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Pump 3
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small General alarm (level 1)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium Circuit 1 compressor 2
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium Circuit 2 compressor 2
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium Circuit 3 compressor 2
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium Evaporator antifreeze heater
Thermostatic valve change (ds)
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium Circuit 1 reverse ventilation (hp)
Free cooling valve (fc or fce)
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium
J19-1 ID15H Digital IN 15,230V Large
J19-2 ID15 IN digital 15 24V Large Circuit 2 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J19-3 ID15C Common digital IN 15 and Large
16
J19-4 ID16 IN digital 16 24V Large Circuit 3 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J19-5 ID16H Digital IN 16,230V Large
J20-1 Y5 Analog output 5 Large Free cooling fan
J20-2 Y6 Analog output 6 Large Inverter (inv)
J20-3 B9 IN passive analog 9 Large Coil temperature at circuit 2 defrosting completed (hp)
Circuit 2 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J20-4 BC9 Common inlet Large
analog 9
J20-5 B10 IN passive analog 10 Large Air temperature (hp or fc or fce or fcd or cp)
J20-6 BC10 Common inlet Large
analog 10
J20-7 ID17 IN digital 17 24V Large On/off recovery (rc)
J20-8 ID18 IN digital 18 24V Large Circuit 2 fan thermal breaker
J20-9 IDC17 Common digital IN 17 and Large
18
J21-1 NO14 Relay 14 NO contact Large Circuit 2 reverse ventilation (hp)
Circuit 1 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J21-2 C14 Common relay 14 Large
J21-3 NC14 Relay 14 NC contact Large
J21-4 NO15 Relay 15 NO contact Large Circuit 1 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 1 condenser coil 3/5 (fc)
J21-5 C15 Common relay 15 Large
J21-6 NC15 Relay 15 NC contact Large
J22-1 C16 Common relay 16, 17 and Large
18

84
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J22-2 NO16 Relay 16 NO contact Large Circuit 2 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 2 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J22-3 NO17 Relay 17 NO contact Large Summer/winter switch (hp)
Circuit 2 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J22-4 NO18 Relay 18 NO contact Large Circuit 2 fans
J22-5 C16 Common relay 16.17 and Large
18
J23-1 E- RS485 connection Large
J23-2 E+ RS485 connection Large
J23-3 GND RS485 connection Large

Slave card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small High pressure circuit 3
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small Low pressure circuit 3
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small Variable set point
(1) Amp current transformer (amp)
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small User 3 outlet temperature
(0) Slave user outlet temperature
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small Coil temperature at circuit 3 defrosting completed (hp)
Circuit 3 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small Circuit 3 condensation control
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small Circuit 4 condensation control
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small Inverter alarm (inv)
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Forced capacity reduction
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Circuit 3 fan thermal breaker
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium High pressure circuit 4
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium Low pressure circuit 4
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium User 4 outlet temperature
(1) Amp current transformer (amp)
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium Circuit 2 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium Circuit 3 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 4 thermal breaker
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium Circuit 3 pressure switches
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium

85
Term. Name Description Card Function
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium Circuit 4 pressure switches
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Circuit 1 compressor 3
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Circuit 2 compressor 3
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Circuit 3 compressor 3
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Circuit 3 fans
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Auxiliary heating (hp)
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Recovery valve (rc)
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Circuit 3 gas discharge valve (rc)
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small Circuit 4 gas discharge valve (rc)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium Circuit 1 compressor 4
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium Circuit 2 compressor 4
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium Circuit 3 compressor 4
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium Circuit 3 reverse ventilation (hp)
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium
J19-1 ID15H Digital IN 15,230V Large
J19-2 ID15 IN digital 15 24V Large Circuit 2 compressor 4 thermal breaker
J19-3 ID15C Common digital IN 15 and Large
16
J19-4 ID16 IN digital 16 24V Large Circuit 3 compressor 4 thermal breaker
J19-5 ID16H Digital IN 16,230V Large
J20-1 Y5 Analog output 5 Large Free cooling fan
J20-2 Y6 Analog output 6 Large
J20-3 B9 IN passive analog 9 Large Coil temperature at circuit 4 defrosting completed (hp)
Circuit 4 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J20-4 BC9 Common inlet Large
analog 9
J20-5 B10 IN passive analog 10 Large Recovery water inlet temperature (rc)
J20-6 BC10 Common inlet Large
analog 10
J20-7 ID17 IN digital 17 24V Large
J20-8 ID18 IN digital 18 24V Large Circuit 4 fan thermal breaker
J20-9 IDC17 Common digital IN 17 and Large
18
J21-1 NO14 Relay 14 NO contact Large Circuit 4 reverse ventilation (hp)
Circuit 3 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J21-2 C14 Common relay 14 Large
J21-3 NC14 Relay 14 NC contact Large
J21-4 NO15 Relay 15 NO contact Large Circuit 3 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 3 condenser coil 3/5 (fc)

86
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J21-5 C15 Common relay 15 Large
J21-6 NC15 Relay 15 NC contact Large
J22-1 C16 Common relay 16, 17 and Large
18
J22-2 NO16 Relay 16 NO contact Large Circuit 4 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 4 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J22-3 NO17 Relay 17 NO contact Large Circuit 4 condenser coil 3/5 (fc)
J22-4 NO18 Relay 18 NO contact Large Circuit 4 fans
J22-5 C16 Common relay 16.17 and Large
18
J23-1 E- RS485 connection Large
J23-2 E+ RS485 connection Large
J23-3 GND RS485 connection Large

Expansion card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small (1) Amp current transformer (amp)
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 1 (fce or
fcd)
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 2 (fce or
fcd)
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 3 (fce or
fcd)
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 4 (fce or
fcd)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Free cooling pump thermal breaker (fcd)
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Free cooling flow switch (fcd)
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Fans 1 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Fans 2 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Fans 3 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small

87
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Fans 4 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
General alarm (level 3)
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Free cooling pump (fcd)
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Circuit 1 gas discharge valve (rc)
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Circuit 2 gas discharge valve (rc)
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small General alarm (level 2)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small

Notes:
(0) With 4 hydraulic circuits, there are 4 user probes: B4 and B8 on the master and slave; With 2 hydraulic circuits
there are 2 B4 master probes for the circuits 1 and 2 and B4 slave for circuit 3 and 4.
(1) The amp current transformer must be connected to the salve B3 input if the variable set point from analog
input is not present, on slave B8 input if the fourth hydraulic circuit is not present or, on expansion card B3
input if the previous options are available at the same time.

88
6.2.7 Configuration ―4B‖
Configuration for the units composed of 16 compressors in four cooling circuits.

Master card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small High pressure circuit 1
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small Low pressure circuit 1
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small Reference water temperature
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small User 1 outlet temperature
(0) Master user outlet temperature
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small Coil temperature at circuit 1 defrosting completed (hp)
Plant return water temperature (fc or fce or fcd)
Circuit 1 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small Circuit 1 condensation control
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small Free cooling valve (fc or fce)
Free cooling pump (fcd)
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small Recovery water valve control (rc)
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small Circuit 2 condensation control
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small External interlock
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small User circuit water flow switch
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Supply control
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Summer/winter switch (hp)
High/low set point switch (ds)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Pump 1 thermal breaker
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Pump 2 thermal breaker
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small Pump 3 thermal breaker
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Circuit 1 fan thermal breaker
Waste water flow switch (ww or hp)
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium High pressure circuit 2
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium Low pressure circuit 2
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium (0) User 2 outlet temperature
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium Circuit 2 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium Circuit 3 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium Circuit 4 compressor 1 thermal breaker
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium Circuit 1 pressure switches
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium Circuit 2 pressure switches
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small

89
Term. Name Description Card Function
J11-3 GND GND connection Small
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Circuit 1 compressor 1
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Circuit 2 compressor 1
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Circuit 3 compressor 1
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Circuit 1 fans
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Pump 1
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Pump 2
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Circuit 4 compressor 1
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small General alarm (level 1)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium Circuit 1 compressor 2
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium Circuit 2 compressor 2
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium Circuit 3 compressor 2
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium Circuit 4 compressor 2
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium Pump 3
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium
J19-1 ID15H Digital IN 15,230V Large
J19-2 ID15 IN digital 15 24V Large Circuit 1 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J19-3 ID15C Common digital IN 15 and Large
16
J19-4 ID16 IN digital 16 24V Large Circuit 2 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J19-5 ID16H Digital IN 16,230V Large
J20-1 Y5 Analog output 5 Large Free cooling fan
J20-2 Y6 Analog output 6 Large Inverter (inv)
J20-3 B9 IN passive analog 9 Large Coil temperature at circuit 2 defrosting completed (hp)
Circuit 2 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J20-4 BC9 Common inlet Large
analog 9
J20-5 B10 IN passive analog 10 Large Air temperature (hp or fc or fce or fcd or cp)
J20-6 BC10 Common inlet Large
analog 10
J20-7 ID17 IN digital 17 24V Large Circuit 3 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J20-8 ID18 IN digital 18 24V Large Circuit 4 compressor 2 thermal breaker
J20-9 IDC17 Common digital IN 17 and Large
18
J21-1 NO14 Relay 14 NO contact Large Evaporator antifreeze heater
Thermostatic valve change (ds)
J21-2 C14 Common relay 14 Large
J21-3 NC14 Relay 14 NC contact Large
J21-4 NO15 Relay 15 NO contact Large Circuit 1 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 1 condenser coil 3/5 (fc)
J21-5 C15 Common relay 15 Large
J21-6 NC15 Relay 15 NC contact Large
J22-1 C16 Common relay 16, 17 and Large
18

90
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J22-2 NO16 Relay 16 NO contact Large Circuit 2 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 2 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J22-3 NO17 Relay 17 NO contact Large Summer/winter switch (hp)
Circuit 2 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J22-4 NO18 Relay 18 NO contact Large Circuit 2 fans
J22-5 C16 Common relay 16.17 and Large
18
J23-1 E- RS485 connection Large
J23-2 E+ RS485 connection Large
J23-3 GND RS485 connection Large

Slave card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small High pressure circuit 3
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small Low pressure circuit 3
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small Variable set point
(1) Amp current transformer (amp)
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small User 3 outlet temperature
(0) Slave user outlet temperature
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small Coil temperature at circuit 3 defrosting completed (hp)
Circuit 3 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small Circuit 3 condensation control
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small Circuit 4 condensation control
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small Inverter alarm (inv)
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Forced capacity reduction
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Circuit 2 fan thermal breaker
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small Circuit 3 fan thermal breaker
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small Circuit 4 fan thermal breaker
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J6-1 B6 Universal analog IN 6 Medium High pressure circuit 4
J6-2 B7 Universal analog IN 7 Medium Low pressure circuit 4
J6-3 B8 Universal analog IN 8 Medium User 4 outlet temperature
(1) Amp current transformer (amp)
J6-4 GND Common analog input Medium
J7-1 ID9 IN digital 9 24V Medium Circuit 1 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-2 ID10 IN digital 10 24V Medium Circuit 2 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-3 ID11 IN digital 11 24V Medium Circuit 3 compressor 3 thermal breaker
J7-4 ID12 IN digital 12 24V Medium Circuit 4 compressor 4 thermal breaker
J7-5 IDC9 Common digital IN 9 - 12 Medium
J8-1 ID13H Digital IN 13 230V Medium Circuit 3 pressure switches
J8-2 ID13 IN digital 13 24V Medium
J8-3 IDC13 Common digital IN 13 and Medium
14
J8-4 ID14 IN digital 14 24V Medium

91
Term. Name Description Card Function
J8-5 ID14H Digital IN 14,230V Medium Circuit 4 pressure switches
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Circuit 1 compressor 3
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Circuit 2 compressor 3
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Circuit 3 compressor 3
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small General alarm (level 2)
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Circuit 3 fans
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Recovery valve (rc)
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small Circuit 4 compressor 3
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small Circuit 1 gas discharge valve (rc)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small
J16-1 C9 Comm. relay 9,10,11 Medium
J16-2 NO9 Relay contact 9 Medium Circuit 2 gas discharge valve (rc)
J16-3 NO10 Relay contact 10 Medium Circuit 3 gas discharge valve (rc)
J16-4 NO11 Relay contact 11 Medium Circuit 4 gas discharge valve (rc)
J16-5 C9 Common relay 9, 10, 11 Medium
J17-1 NO12 Relay 12 NO contact Medium Circuit 3 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 3 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J17-2 C12 Common relay 12 Medium
J17-3 NC12 Relay 12 NC contact Medium
J18-1 NO13 Relay 13 NO contact Medium Circuit 4 4-way valve (hp)
Circuit 4 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J18-2 C13 Common relay 13 Medium
J18-3 NC13 Relay 13 NC contact Medium
J19-1 ID15H Digital IN 15,230V Large
J19-2 ID15 IN digital 15 24V Large Circuit 1 compressor 4 thermal breaker
J19-3 ID15C Common digital IN 15 and Large
16
J19-4 ID16 IN digital 16 24V Large Circuit 2 compressor 4 thermal breaker
J19-5 ID16H Digital IN 16,230V Large
J20-1 Y5 Analog output 5 Large Free cooling fan
J20-2 Y6 Analog output 6 Large
J20-3 B9 IN passive analog 9 Large Coil temperature at circuit 4 defrosting completed (hp)
Circuit 4 waste water temperature (ww and hp)
J20-4 BC9 Common inlet Large
analog 9
J20-5 B10 IN passive analog 10 Large Recovery water inlet temperature (rc)
J20-6 BC10 Common inlet Large
analog 10
J20-7 ID17 IN digital 17 24V Large Circuit 3 compressor 4 thermal breaker
J20-8 ID18 IN digital 18 24V Large Circuit 4 compressor 4 thermal breaker
J20-9 IDC17 Common digital IN 17 and Large
18
J21-1 NO14 Relay 14 NO contact Large Circuit 1 compressor 4
J21-2 C14 Common relay 14 Large
J21-3 NC14 Relay 14 NC contact Large
J21-4 NO15 Relay 15 NO contact Large Circuit 2 compressor 4

92
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J21-5 C15 Common relay 15 Large
J21-6 NC15 Relay 15 NC contact Large
J22-1 C16 Common relay 16, 17 and Large
18
J22-2 NO16 Relay 16 NO contact Large Circuit 3 compressor 4
J22-3 NO17 Relay 17 NO contact Large Circuit 4 compressor 4
J22-4 NO18 Relay 18 NO contact Large Circuit 4 fans
J22-5 C16 Common relay 16.17 and Large
18
J23-1 E- RS485 connection Large
J23-2 E+ RS485 connection Large
J23-3 GND RS485 connection Large

Expansion card

Term. Name Description Card Function

J1-1 G Power supply Small
J1-2 GO Power supply reference Small
J2-1 B1 Universal analog IN 1 Small
J2-2 B2 Universal analog IN 2 Small
J2-3 B3 Universal analog IN 3 Small (1) Amp current transformer (amp)
J2-4 GND Common analog input Small
J2-5 +VDC Probe power supply Small
J3-1 B4 IN passive analog 4 Small
J3-2 BC4 Common inlet Small
analog 4
J3-3 B5 IN passive analog 5 Small
J3-4 BC5 Common analog input 5 Small
J4-1 VG OUT 24V power supply Small
J4-2 VG0 OUT 0V power supply Small
J4-3 Y1 Analog output 1 Small
J4-4 Y2 Analog output 2 Small
J4-5 Y3 Analog output 3 Small
J4-6 Y4 Analog output 4 Small
J5-1 ID1 IN digital 1 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 1 (fce or
fcd)
J5-2 ID2 IN digital 2 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 2 (fce or
fcd)
J5-3 ID3 IN digital 3 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 3 (fce or
fcd)
J5-4 ID4 IN digital 4 24V Small Thermal breakers of external free cooling fans 4 (fce or
fcd)
J5-5 ID5 IN digital 5 24V Small Free cooling pump thermal breaker (fcd)
J5-6 ID6 IN digital 6 24V Small Free cooling flow switch (fcd)
J5-7 ID7 IN digital 7 24V Small On/off recovery (rc)
J5-8 ID8 IN digital 8 24V Small
J5-9 IDC1 Common digital IN 1 - 8 Small
J9 8-way phone connector Small
J10 6-way phone connector Small
J11-1 TX- RX-/TX- connection Small
J11-2 TX+ RX+/TX+ connection Small
J11-3 GND GND connection Small
J12-1 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J12-2 NO1 Relay contact 1 Small Fans 1 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
Circuit 1 reverse ventilation (hp)
Circuit 3 condenser coil 3/5 (fc)
J12-3 NO2 Relay contact 2 Small Fans 2 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
Circuit 2 reverse ventilation (hp)
Circuit 4 condenser coil 3/5 (fc)

93
 Term. Name Description Card Function
J12-4 NO3 Relay contact 3 Small Fans 3 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
Circuit 1 condenser coil 2/5 (fc)
J12-5 C1 Common relay 1, 2, 3 Small
J13-1 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J13-2 NO4 Relay contact 4 Small Fan 4 of external free cooling (fce or fcd)
J13-3 NO5 Relay contact 5 Small Circuit 3 reverse ventilation (hp)
Free cooling pump (fcd)
J13-4 NO6 Relay contact 6 Small Circuit 4 reverse ventilation (hp)
Free cooling valve (fc or fce)
J13-5 C4 Common relay 4, 5, 6 Small
J14-1 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J14-2 NO7 Relay contact 7 Small General alarm (level 3)
J14-3 C7 Common relay 7 Small
J15-1 NO8 Relay 8 NO contact Small Auxiliary heating (hp)
J15-2 C8 Common relay 8 Small
J15-3 NC8 Relay 8 NC contact Small

Notes:
(0) With 4 hydraulic circuits, there are 4 user probes: B4 and B8 on the master and slave; With 2 hydraulic circuits
there are 2 B4 master probes for the circuits 1 and 2 and B4 slave for circuit 3 and 4.
(1) The amp current transformer must be connected to the salve B3 input if the variable set point from analog
input is not present, on slave B8 input if the fourth hydraulic circuit is not present or, on expansion card B3
input if the previous options are available at the same time.

94
7 TEMPLATES

7.1 General information

By scrolling through the templates you can access the parameters in the different access levels and set their values.
The templates are displayed in the form of a tree diagram in order to make scrolling and searching easier.
The division into different branches is based on homogeneous functions.
Each branch is placed on a different access level and, where necessary, it is protected by password or requires a
special key combination.
Regardless of the template selected, if you do not press any key for 5 minutes, the control automatically returns to
the first template in the menu.
The values and settings shown in the templates of this manual are only indicative. The actual values of the controls
are different and depend on the unit features.

7.2 Tree diagram of the templates

Comprises the following branches: Service, Maintenance, GSM, Clock, Menu, Set, I/O and History.
To access to the various branches, the control will display, after pressing the "prog" key, a template containing a
continuous loop, where all the available menus are shown on three lines.
The template comprises two side lines of normal thickness and a double central line which corresponds to the
branch selected, as per the following example.

m_main_Scroll m_main_Scroll m_main_Scroll

Cambia Change Wechsel
Menu Menu Menu
Set Set Set

The complete loop is:

Italian: ―Menù‖; ―Set‖; ―I/O‖; ―Orologio‖; ―GSM‖; ―Manuten.―; ―Service‖; "On/Off"; "Cambio" e ―Allarmi‖.
English: ―Menu‖; ―Set‖; ―I/O‖; ―Clock‖; ―GSM‖; ―Mainten.―; ―Service‖; "On/Off"; "Change" e ―Alarms‖.
German: ―Menu‖; ―Set‖; ―I/O‖; ―Uhr‖; ―GSM‖; ― Wartung―; ― Service‖; "Ein/Aus―; "Wechsel― e "Alarme―.
Spanish: ―Menu‖; ―Set‖; ―I/O‖; ―Reloj‖; ―GSM‖; ―Manten.―; ― Servicio‖; " On/Off‖; "Cambio― e "Alarmas―.
French: ―Menu‖; ―Set‖; ―E/S‖; ―Horloge‖; ―GSM‖; ―Entret.―; ― Service‖; " On/Off‖; "Echange― e "Alarmes―.

The access mode is described at the beginning of each paragraph.

Use the arrow keys to switch from one template to another.
The cursor will be positioned on the left hand side of the top field for each template, except for the main menu
template.
To switch from one field to another, where you may change the value, you must press the "enter" key.
The set value of a field selected with the "enter" key can be changed using the arrow keys.
By pressing the "enter" key again, the value changed is confirmed and you can go to the next step.

95
7.2.1 Service Templates
In the Service branch you can set all the operating parameters of the unit.
To access the "Service" branch, press the "prg" key and then scroll through the template options using the arrow
keys until on the centre of the display will appear the double sized message "Service". Confirm with "enter".

SERV_1 SERV_1 SERV_1

Password Service Service Password Wartung Password
00000 00000 00000

From this template, after having entered the correct password ―00200‖ using the "up/down arrow keys" and
confirmed it with the "enter", you may access the other templates of the branch.
Once you have accessed the branch, you can scroll through the templates using the "up/down arrow keys".
If you remain for an interval of five minutes within the branch without pressing any key, the display returns to the first
template of the menu branch.
The values shown in the templates of this manual are only indicative. The correct values depend on the actual
design of the unit to be controlled.

SERV_2 SERV_2 SERV_2

Diff.le Funz. 02.0°C Differ.Temp. 02.0°C Diff.Temp. 02.0°C
Limiti Set Point Set Point limits Sollwert Grenze
CH-S 16.0°C I 08.0°C CH-S 16.0°C I 08.0°C CH-S 16.0°C I 08.0°C
HP-S 45.0°C I 35.0°C HP-S 45.0°C I 35.0°C HP-S 45.0°C I 35.0°C

n this form is entered the differential of operation, which is the same both for chiller and heat pump mode, and the
minimum and maximum limits within which the set point for chiller mode can be set. If the outlet control operation
mode is enabled, the first line will be empty.

SERV_3 SERV_3 SERV_3

Limiti Funzionamento Operating limits Betriebsgrenze
CH-S 25.0°C I 04.0°C CH-H 25.0°C L 04.0°C CH-H 25.0°C N 04.0°C
HP-S 50.0℃ I 30.0℃ HP-H 50.0°C L 30.0°C HP-H 50.0°C N 30.0°C

This template contains the maximum and minimum thresholds which the unit can reach when operating in cooling or
heating mode.
Operation beyond these limits causes the unit stoppage and the relative template alarm trip.
The control of alarms is different. Stopping and signalling due to maximum limit in cooling mode and minimum limit
in heating mode are delayed to enable the plant regular operation.
Stopping and signalling due to minimum limit in cooling mode and maximum limit in heating mode occur immediately
after reaching the limits.

SERV_03A SERV_03A SERV_03A

Antigelo 2 03.0°C Min.value 2 03.0°C Frostschutz 2 03.0°C
Diff. 2 06.0°C Diff 2 06.0°C Diff 2 06.0°C

This template is displayed only for water/water units in heat pump mode, where to change the minimum operating
limit of the source heat exchanger.

SERV_4 SERV_4 SERV_4

Diff.le LWT 06.0°C LWT Diff. 06.0°C Diff. LWT 06.0°C
Diff.le OUT 03.0°C OUT diff. 03.0°C Diff. OUT 03.0°C
Rit.Sup.Soglia 30m Upp.thresh.delay 30m Verz.temp.Grenze 30m
Tempo Buzzer 060s Buzzer time 060s Klingelzeit 060s

In this template you can set the differential values to cancel the alarms caused by exceeded temperature threshold
and also the tripping time of the delay alarms.
On the last line you can set the time at which, at any alarm trip, the acoustic signalling will be enabled in the
terminals.

96
SERV_6_1 SERV_6_1 SERV_6_1

Antigelo 2 04.0°C Minim.Value2 04.0°C Frostschutz 2 04.0°C

Max.Temp.OUT2 55.0°C MaxOUT Temp.2 55.0°C Max.Wert_2 55.0°C

This template contains the minimum threshold values of the ingoing water temperature and the maximum values of
the outgoing water temperature, which apply for the water/water units operating in heat pump mode during winter.
The template presence is related to the enablement of the winter operation mode for the water-cooled units.

SERV_05 SERV_05 SERV_05

Ritard.Al.Flussost. Flow switch al.delay Verzug Strömungsw.
Avvio 20s Funz. 05s Start 20s Runn. 05s Start.20s Betr. 05s
Spegnim.Pomp. 30s Pump off 30s Pumpe Abst. 30s

In this template are entered the signal delays of the alarm caused by the lack of water flow during pump start-up and
operation and the delay for pump shutdown after the last compressor is turned off via keyboard or serial card or
when the set point is reached.

SERV_06 SERV_06 SERV_06

Gradini FPM Steps FPM Stufen FPM
Rit.All.ID3 60s ID3 alarm delay 60s ID3 Verzoeg.Al 60s
Rit.Rip.All.ID3 10m ID3 delay al.res.10m ID3 Verz.Wiedere.10m

In this template you can choose the compressor start-up type and, therefore, the capacity reduction of FPM and
CPM cooling circuits; you can also set the delay for controlling the "ID3" digital input status and the correct phase
sequence or the time period after which is possible to restart the unit when the voltage is controlled through ID3
digital input.

SERV_07 SERV_07 SERV_07

Minima fermata 180s Min.off. time 180s Min.Stillst.Zeit180s
Antiriciclo 300s Start delay 300s Startverz. 300s
Minimo Funz. 120s Min.on time 120s Min.Laufzeit 120s
Ritar.Attiv. 030s Steps delay 030s Stufenverz. 030s

The operating times of the compressors that can be set into this template are related to the minimum stop time, the
delay between two consecutive start-ups, the minimum operating time of one compressor and the delay between the
successive enablement of the two compressors.
The next disablement occurs at a fixed not accessible time of 5 seconds.

SERV_08 SERV_08 SERV_08

Ritar.A. Pompa 030s Pump start del. 030s Pumpe Verz.Start030s
Ritar.S. Pompa 030s Pump off delay 030s Pumpe Verz.Stop 030s
Speg.Pompe da ID 10m ID pump off del. 10m Pump.Aus nach ID 10m

In this template you can set the minimum delay between the start of the pump/pumps and the first compressor at
unit start-up, between the arrest of the last compressor and pump/pumps at unit shutdown, using the keyboard or via
serial card, and the delay of pump shutdown after the arrest of the compressors when the unit is turned off via digital
input.

SERV_09 SERV_09 SERV_09

HP1 39.0b Diff 05.0b HP1 39.0b Diff 05.0b HD1 39.0b Diff 05.0b
HP2 36.0b Diff 05.0b HP2 36.0b Diff 05.0b HD2 36.0b Diff 05.0b
LP1 04.5b Diff 01.0b LP1 04.5b Diff 01.0b ND1 04.5b Diff 01.0b
LP2 02.5b Diff 01.0b LP2 02.5b Diff 01.0b NP2 02.5b Diff 01.0b

In this template you must set the pressure thresholds controlled and their differential values:
HP1 is the high pressure limit reached at which the control will reduce the operation of the relative cooling circuit by
shutting down one compressor; the limit is the same both for cooling and heat pump operation mode.
HP2 is the high pressure limit reached at which the control disables the recovery and starts the fans for
condensation.
97
LP1 is the low pressure limit reached during the cooling mode operation at which the control reduces the operation
of the relative cooling circuit by shutting down one compressor; the shutdown of all compressors occurs at the set
value minus 0.3 bar, regardless of the refrigerant in the unit.
LP2 corresponds to the low pressure limit for the heat pump operation mode.

SERV_10 SERV_10 SERV_10

Diff.HP-LP 5.0b HP-LP diff. 5.0 b Diff.HP-LP 5.0b
Delta Funz.to 5.0°C Delta operat. 5.0℃ Delta T.Betrieb5.0°C
Ritardo Eff.za 200s Effic.cy delay 200s Uberpröf.Verz. 200s
Tolleranza 04 Tolerance 04 Toleranz 04

In the first line you must set the minimum value of the pressure difference between delivery and suction line when
the circuit is running.
In the second line you must set the theoretical value of the temperature difference between water inlet and outlet
under nominal full load conditions.
The third line contains the delay with which the control checks the temperature difference between inlet and outlet
after each variation of the number of compressors running.
In the fourth line you must set the tolerance level of the temperature difference detected between unit inlet and
outlet according to the number of compressors running.
The correct value of the water temperature difference between inlet and outlet can only be checked by controlling
the inlet temperature and enabling the operation of the "Maintenance" branch.

SERV_11 SERV_11 SERV_11

Rit.Bassa Pressione Low pressure delay Verzoeg.Niederdruck
Avviamento 010s Start 010s Start 010s
Funzionamento 005s Operating 005s Betrieb 005s
Sbrinamento 020s Defrost 020s Abtauung 020s

In this template you must set the delay at which the low pressure alarm will be enabled when the first compressor of
each cooling circuit will start, during operation and defrosting.

SERV_12 SERV_12 SERV_12

Rot.Comp. Si Comp.Rot. Y Ums.Komp. J
Pomp. Si Pump Y Pumpe J
Ore Rot.Pompe 008h Pump rot.delay 008h Pumpe Unsch. 008h
Rit.Spegn.Rot. 030s Pump off delay 030s Pumpe Aussch. 030s

In this template you can enable the turns of compressors' operation. If there are two 2 pumps provided, the lines for
enabling their turns will be displayed. If their turns are enabled, the time for operation turns will be set together with
the time at which the pumps will operate simultaneously at turning moment.

SERV_13 SERV_13 SERV_13

Contr.Cond. Cond.Contr. Drehzahlregelung
Vent.Set 15°C d.05°C Fan Set 15°C d.05°C Sol.Vent.15°C d.05°C
FCS Set 35°C FSC Set 35°C DZR Soll.35°C
Diff.leA 05°C F.13°C Diff. S.05°C W.13°C Diff. S.05°C B.13°C

In this template you can set the parameters for the digital output enablement which controls the fans and those of
the analog output which controls the condensation.
The parameters are expressed in temperature and correspond to the dew point of the relative gas pressure.

SERV_13A SERV_13A SERV_13A

Contr.Evap. Evap.Contr. Verdampfdruckreg.

FSC Set 20℃ FCS Set 20℃ DZR Soll.20°C

Diff.leA 07°C F.17°C Diff. S. 07°C W.17°C Diff. S. 07°C B.17°C

In this template you must set the values for controlling the evaporation during the heat pump operation mode.
Currently, the digital output switches on automatically at the start-up of the first compressor of the relative cooling
circuit.

98
SERV_13A1 SERV_13A1 SERV_13A1
Secondo set param. Fan speed control 2nd parameter
contr. Cond. second parameters Drehzahlregler
FSC Set 40℃ FCS Set 40℃ DZR Soll.40°C
Diff.leA 08°C F.20°C Diff. S. 08°C W.20°C Diff. S. 08°C B.20°C

In this template you can input the second set of values for controlling the fan speed during plant hot water
production.

SERV_14 SERV_14 SERV_14

Sbrin.Contemp. Si Simul.Defrost Y Abtauung gleichz. J
Ritardo Sbr. 30m Def. Delay 30m Min.Abtau.Zeig. 30m
Rit.Sbrin.Circ. 05m Dif.cir.def.delay00m Abtauu.Verzoeg. 05m
Forzat.Comp. 030s Compres.force 000s Vol-last Kompr. 030s

This template and the next four templates are present only in the heat pump units.
In this template you must set the delay between two consecutive defrost cycles for the same circuit should the
defrost occur simultaneously for the entire unit or for a single circuit, the delay between the defrost cycles of two
different circuits if the defrost has been provided for separate circuits and the time at which all compressors must
operate prior to defrost cycle start.

SERV_15 SERV_15 SERV_15

T.Iniz.Sbr. -19.0℃ T.start def. -19.0°C Start Abt.Temp-19.0°C
Rit.Inizio Sbr. 120s Defrost delay 120s Abtau.Verz. 120s
Rit.primo Sbr. 010m First defr.delay010m Ver.erste Abtau.010m
Sbr.minimo 15s Minimum defrost 15s Min.Abt.Zeit 15s

In the first line of this template you must set the condition for enabling the defrost request.
According to the manufacturer branch setting, the condition may be a temperature value obtained by converting the
suction pressure, as shown for example in the template or, coefficients for the calculation of the difference between
the gas and the ambient air temperature.
Regardless of the condition that enables the defrost request, in the following lines you must set the time during which
the request must be hold to allow the cycle to start, the minimum time that must elapse from unit start-up to allow a
sufficient accumulation of heat in order to make an effective defrost, and the temperature corresponding to the
conversion of gas delivery pressure at which defrost must finish.

SERV_16 SERV_16 SERV_16

Temp.Sbr.Aria 15.0°C Air temp.defr.15.0°C Luft.Temp.Abt.15.0°C
Tempo Max.Sbr. 240s Max.Defrost.time Max.Abtau.Zeit 240s
240s
T.G.fine Sbr. 48.0℃ T.G.end defr. 48.0℃ Abt Stop 48.0°C
T.B.fine Sbr. 05.0°C C.T.end defr. 05.0°C tc Abt. Stop 05.0°C

In this template you must set the value of the air temperature above which the defrost does not occur when
reversing the cooling cycle but when compressors stop and the air simply passes through the evaporation coil, the
maximum time of a defrost cycle occurring both when reversing the cooling and air cycle, the defrost stopping
temperature, obtained by converting the pressure and temperature on the coil during defrosting above the value at
which the control will disable the reverse ventilation allowing the delivery pressure to be increased for complete
defrosting.

SERV_17 SERV_17 SERV_17

Estate/Inverno da Summer/Winter from Sommer/Winter nach
Ingresso Digitale No digital input N digitaler Eingang N
Ritardo Inversione Operating mode swap Umschlt.Verz.
Funzionamento 010m delay 010m Betrieb 010m

You can switch from summer to winter mode and vice versa via digital input and also set the time that must elapse
from the moment the switch was requested to compressors' restart. The template is related to the heat pump mode
enablement.

SERV_19 SERV_19 SERV_19

Temp.Vent.Inv.45.0°C Rev.Temp.vent.45.0°C Luf.Temp.abt. 45.0℃
Diff.Temp.Inv.03.0°C Rev.Diff.Temp.03.0°C Diff.Temp.Inv.03.0°C
Anticipo Vent. 15s Div.valve delay 15s Zeitvor.4W-V.Ums.15s
Forzatura Sbr. No Manual defrost N Manuelle Abtau. N
99
In this template you must set the value of the temperature obtained by converting the delivery pressure for reverse
ventilation enablement during defrost and the relative differential pressure, the time at which the fans start operation
at defrost completed and before the last cycle inversion; defrost may be forced regardless of the delays including the
minimum operation delay at start-up.
The manual forcing of defrost cycle leads to contemporaneous defrost of the entire unit, even if the defrost cycle was
set to run separately.

SERV_20 SERV_20 SERV_20

Limite funz.HP -00°C HP work.limit -00°C WP Betriebgrenz-00°C
Integr.riscal. -00°C Heater integr. -00°C Zus.Hiezung ab -00°C

In this template you can set two values for the external air temperature.
The value from the first line refers to the operating limit while the one in the second line refers to the value for
integrating the unit heating into other sources.

SERV_21 SERV_21 SERV_21

Cambio Set da
Tastiera Digital input digitaler Eingang
Set cambio Valvola Dual set swap Sollwert Umschaltung
Bassa Temp. +05.0°C valve +15.0°C Tiefe Temp. +15.0°C

With the dual set point function, the following template will be displayed for setting the switch mode for the operation
set point (from keyboard or digital input) and the reference water temperature that enables the output for any
thermostatic expansion valve exchange.

SERV_22 SERV_22 SERV_22

Zona Morta 1.5°C Dead zone 1.5°C Totzone 1.5°C
Funz. Chiller Chiller operating Summer Betrieb
Diff. speg. 02.0°C Diff.unload 02.0°C Neg. Regelber 02.0°C
Diff. accen. 05.0°C Diff. load 05.0°C Pos. Regelber 05.0°C

When the outgoing water temperature control is enabled, the following template will be displayed for setting the dead
zone and the differential pressures for chiller mode switch on/off.

SERV_23 SERV_23 SERV_23

T.max dis.CH 0030s Su.M.Unload D. 0030s So.Max.Neg.Reg.0030s
T.min dis.CH 0006s Su.m.Unload D. 0006s So.Min.Neg.Reg.0006s
T.max Att.CH 0120s Su.M. load D. 0120s So.Max.Pos.Reg.0120s
T.min Att.CH 0030s Su.m. load D. 0030s So.Min.Pos.Reg.0030s

In this template you must set the minimum and maximum times required for the control to enable or disable the
power steps after you have set the parameters for the previous template output control. The values only refer to the
chiller mode operation.

SERV_24 SERV_24 SERV_24

Zona Morta 1.5°C Dead zone 1.5°C Totzone 1.5°C
Funz.Pompa di Calore Winter operating Winter Betrieb
Diff. speg. 02.0°C Diff.unload 02.0°C Neg. Regelber 02.0°C
Diff. Accen. 05.0°C Diff. load 05.0°C Pos. Regelber 05.0°C

Like in the case of chiller only units, you can set the output control parameters for heat pump units. The parameters
for heat pump operating mode may be different from those set for the chiller mode.

SERV_25 SERV_25 SERV_25

T.max dis.HP 0030s Wi.M.Unload D. 0030s Wi.Max.Neg.Reg.0030s
T.min dis.HP 0006s Wi.m.Unload D. 0006s Wi.Min.Neg.Reg.0006s
T.max Att.HP 0120s Wi.M. load D. 0120s Wi.Max.Pos.Reg.0120s
T.min Att.HP 0030s Wi.m. load D. 0030s Wi.Min.Pos.Reg.0030s

100
Like previous template parameters, the increase/decrease times for the power steps may be different during the
heat pump mode with respect to the chiller mode.
Obviously, these last three templates are present only on the heat pumps.

SERV_26 SERV_26 SERV_26

Limite OFF OFF Compressors Kom.Aus.Gren.03.5°C
Compressori 03.5°C Lower Limit 03.5°C

In this template you must set the reference water temperature, which in this case is the output water, below which
the control switches off the operating compressors without waiting for the shutdown times to elapse, to avoid
reaching the safety antifreeze value.

SERV_27 SERV_27 SERV_27

Limite Set Var.Fred. Su.Contin.Set Point So.Sollwertversch.
Superiore +15.0°C Upper limit +15.0°C Hochgrenze +15.0°C
Inferiore +08.0°C lower limit +08.0°C Tiefgrenze +08.0°C
Segnale 0-10V Signal 0-10V Signal 0-10V

In this template, which is present only when using the variable set point from the analog input, you must set the
upper and lower limits within which the set point will vary according to the signal and the signal type used for its
variation.
However, the fields containing the lower and upper values must be within the set point limits set in the ―SERV_03‖
template.

SERV_28 SERV_28 SERV_28

Limite Set Var.Cald. Wi.Contin.Set Point Wi.Sollwertversch.
Superiore +40.0℃ Upper limit +40.0℃ Hochgrenze +40.0℃
Inferiore +35.0°C Lower limit +35.0°C Tiefgrenze +35.0°C

In this template, which is present when, in addition to the variable set point displayed in the previous template, the
unit is in heat pump mode, you must set the upper and lower limits within which the set point will vary according to
the signal variation and the type of signal during winter operation.
Like for the previous template, the fields containing the lower and upper values must, however, be within the winter
set point limits set in the ―SERV_03‖ template.
The type of signal is the one selected in the previous template.

SERV_29 SERV_29 SERV_29

Diff.recupero 3.0°C Recovery diff. 3.0°C WRG-Kond.dif. 03.0°C
Dif.Valv.Recu.04.0°C Reco.diff.valv04.0°C WRG-Ven.Dif. 04.0°C
A.min.Valv.R 015% Recov.min.open.015% WRG-Ven.min.Er. 015%

In this template, which is related to the unit heat recovery, you must set the differential of the recovery enablement
set point, the differential of any recovery valve is represented by the percentage of its minimum opening.

SERV_30 SERV_30 SERV_30

Valv.Scarico Batter. Coil descharge valve Reg. Abfluss Vent.
SetpC6.5b dif.le0,7b SetpC6.5b diffe.0,7b SetpC6.5b dif. 0,7b
SetpH2.8b dif.le0,4b SetpH2.8b diffe.0,4b SetpH2.8b dif. 0,4b

With the heat recovery in the second line of this template, you can set the low pressure and its differential value
below which it will be opened a solenoid valve for discharging the refrigerant from the condensing coil.
The parameters of the third line refer to the same purpose during the heat pump operation; because this option is
not available, the parameters cannot be used.

SERV_31A SERV_31A SERV_31A

Compensazione Est. Summer Compens. Summer Kompens.
temp.T1 25.0℃ T1 Temp. 25.0°C T1 Temp. 25.0°C
temp.T2 30.0°C T2 Temp. 30.0°C T2 Temp. 30.0°C
Diff.le Comp.ne 05°C Compens.Diff. 05°C Kompens.Diff. 05°C

The units with compensation of the operation set point with respect to the external air value are provided with this
template in which you must set the limits of the temperature for the compensation of the set point differential.
101
SERV_31B SERV_31B SERV_31B
Compensazione Inv. Winter compens. Winter Kompens.
temp.T1 15.0°C T1 Temp. 15.0°C T1 Temp. 25.0°C
temp.T2 10.0℃ T2 Temp. 10.0°C T2 Temp. 30.0°C
Diff.le Comp.ne 05°C Compens.Diff. 05°C Kompens.Diff. 05°C

In the heat pump units, when compensation is provided, in addition to the previous template for entering the
parameters related to the cooling mode, this template is also present for setting the heating mode parameters.
If the compensation is not required for one of the two operation modes, it is enough to set the same value for both
―T1‖ and ―T2‖ parameters.

SERV_32 SERV_32 SERV_32

Tempo B.C. 200s Low load time 200s Ziet T.A. 200s
Diff.le B.C. 04.0°C Low load diff.04.0°C Diff.le T.A. 04.0°C

In this template, which is present for the low charge control, you must set the operation time for detecting the
operation low charge and differential under low charge condition.

SERV_33 SERV_33 SERV_33

Free Cooling Free Cooling Freie Kuehlung
Diff.le Funz. 02.0°C Working dif. 02.0°C Betriebsdiff. 02.0°C
Diff.le Disab.03.0°C Disab.diff. 03.0°C Stop diff. FC 02.0°C
Temp.off Comp-02.0°C Off Comp.temp-02.0°C Stop AT Komp.-02.0°C

This template and the following two are related to the unit free cooling mode.
The values that must be set in this template are the temperature difference between return water from the plant and
the external air that enables the free cooling mode, the differential below the operation set point for enabling the free
cooling mode and the air temperature below which the control prevents the compressors from functioning.

SERV_33A SERV_33A SERV_33A

Ventil. free Cooling Start external free Start Externe
esterno avvio 04.0V cooling 04.0V Freie Kuehler 04.0V
Segnale min. 02.0V Min. signal 02.0V Min. Signal 02.0V
Segnale max. 10.0V Max. signal 10.0V Max. signal 10.0V

This template is present only when the external free cooling and at least one analog output for the speed continuous
control are provided.
In the fields of this template you must set the minimum and maximum values of the signal, within which the
regulation must be enabled and the start-up value.

SERV_34 SERV_34 SERV_34

Free Cooling Free Cooling Freie Kuehlung
Set1 37.0 diff. 17.0 Set1 37.0 diff. 17.0 1Stufe37.0 diff. 17.0
Set1 36.9 diff. 17.0 Set2 36.9 diff. 17.0 2Stufe36.9 diff. 17.0
Ritardo Cambio 05s Swap delay 05s Umschlt.Verzoeg. 05s

In the free cooling units, which have the water-cooled coil installed in front of the condensing coil, it is necessary to
control the condensation by reducing the condensing coil capacity.
In this template you can set two values for the pressure and their differentials, at which the capacity steps are
switched from one to another.
In the last line you must set the delay with which, after increasing the fraction of the operating coil, the control will
ignore the pressure value read.

SERV_35 SERV_35 SERV_35

Funz.to Contemp. 10s Simul.working 10s Kont.Zusammen 10s
Temp. 5/5 15.0°C Temp.5/5 15.0°C Temp.5/5 15.0°C
Limite sup.FC 20°C FC Upper limit 20°C Hoher FK Grenze 20°C

In this template you must set other two parameters for controlling the condensation when the condensing coil is
split. The parameters consist of the time during which, when switching from the first capacity step to the second,
both continue to operate simultaneously, and the value of the air temperature above which the condensation is not
controlled by this system.

102
In the last line you must set the value of the air temperature above which, even if the conditions for free cooling
mode are provided, the control does not enable it.

SERV_36 SERV_36 SERV_36

N.Comp.1 AFC SI N.Comp.1 AFC Y N.Komp.1 AFC J
Tempo Tp 0030m Time Tp 0030m Zeit Tp 0030 m
Tempo Tf 0030s Time Tf 0030s Zeit Tf 0030 s
Tempo Tpc 0030m Time Tpc 0030m Zeit Tpc 0030 m

In this template you must enable some functions and set the relative parameters provided for the oil return to the
parallel connected compressors.
In particular, these parameters have been provided in the software for the management of three parallel connected
compressors.
In the first line you must set the number of operating compressors for which the start-up of a second compressor is
forced and if one compressor shutdown should be forced when the circuit operates at full load.
If the first parameter is set to "0" the start-up will not be forced while, by setting "NO", the shutdown at full load will
not be forced.
In the lines left are set the delay times for the functions' control, namely:
In the second line you must set the continuous operation time with the number of compressors indicated in the
previous line, before forcing.
In the third line you must set the minimum time at which forcing occurs regardless of the plant demand.
In the fourth line you must set the time for continuous operation at full load, before the forced shutdown of one
compressor occurs.
The compressors which may be turned off are the second and the third, but never the first.

SERV_99 SERV_99 SERV_99

Seriale Supervisor system Ueberwachung System
Prot. MODBUS Prot. MODBUS Prot. MODBUS
Vel.Com. 1200 bds Spd.com. 1200 bds Gsc.Ueb. 1200 bds
N° Ident.001 ID No. 001 Ident.N° 001

In this template, if using the serial output, you must set the protocol and the communication speed specified and the
address to be assigned to the control.
It is important to set the speed of 19200 for the Carel protocol, 9600 for Modem GSM protocol and 4800 for
LonWorks.

SERV_100 SERV_100 SERV_100

Parametri Default No Default parameter N Abschreib.Back-up N
Lingua Language Software
Italiano English Deutsch

In this template you can enter the parameters related to factory settings.
All values saved and then restored, belong to the Service and Maintenance branch, related to operation settings.
In the last line you can set the language in which the interface template will be displayed.

103
7.2.2 Maintenance Templates
In the Maintenance branch you can set all the parameters required for controlling the unit compressors and pumps'
maintenance.
To access the "Maintenance" branch, press the "prg" key and then scroll through the template options using the
arrow keys until on the centre of the display will appear the double sized message "Maintenance". Confirm with
"enter".
Some templates, which display the operating hours of compressors, units and any pumps and the number of their
start-ups, can be accessed without a password.
To scroll through the protected templates you must set the default password, 00300.
Once you have accessed the branch, you can scroll through the templates using the "up/down arrow keys".
If you remain for an interval of five minutes within the branch without pressing any key, the display returns to the first
template of the menu branch.

MANU _01 MANU _01 MANU _01

Ore funzionamento Operation hours Betriebsstunden
Unità 00000 Unit 00000 Geraet 00000
P1 00000 P2 00000 P1 00000 P2 00000 P1 00000 P2 00000
P3 00000 PFC 00000 P3 00000 PFC 00000 P3 00000 PFC 00000

MANU _02 MANU _02 MANU _02

Ore funzionamento Operation hours Betriebsstunden
C1 00000 C2 00000 C1 00000 C2 00000 C1 00000 C2 00000
C3 00000 C4 00000 C3 00000 C4 00000 C3 00000 C4 00000
C5 00000 C6 00000 C5 00000 C6 00000 C5 00000 C6 00000

MANU _03 MANU _03 MANU _03

Ore funzionamento Operation hours Betriebsstunden
C7 00000 C8 00000 C7 00000 C8 00000 C7 00000 C8 00000
C9 00000 C10 00000 C9 00000 C10 00000 C9 00000 C10 00000
C11 00000 C12 00000 C11 00000 C12 00000 C11 00000 C12 00000

MANU _04 MANU _04 MANU _04

Ore funzionamento Operation hours Betriebsstunden
C13 00000 C14 00000 C13 00000 C14 00000 C13 00000 C14 00000
C15 00000 C16 00000 C15 00000 C16 00000 C15 00000 C16 00000

The presence of these templates and their lines depends on the type of the unit in which the control is installed. Here
is displayed the number of operation hours of each component mentioned. The control records the operation hours
individually but recording every three units which means that, in case of lack of voltage before recording, when the
control is restarted it will begin counting from the last record.

MANU _05 MANU _05 MANU _05

N° Avviamenti Starting n° Anlaufanzahl
Unità 00000 Unit 00000 Geraet 00000
P1 00000 P2 00000 P1 00000 P2 00000 P1 00000 P2 00000
P3 00000 PFC 00000 P3 00000 PFC 00000 P3 00000 PFC 00000

MANU _06 MANU _06 MANU _06

N° Avviamenti Starting n° Anlaufanzahl
C1 00000 C2 00000 C1 00000 C2 00000 C1 00000 C2 00000
C3 00000 C4 00000 C3 00000 C4 00000 C3 00000 C4 00000
C5 00000 C6 00000 C5 00000 C6 00000 C5 00000 C6 00000

MANU _07 MANU _07 MANU _07

N° Avviamenti Starting n° Anlaufanzahl
C7 00000 C8 00000 C7 00000 C8 00000 C7 00000 C8 00000
C9 00000 C10 00000 C9 00000 C10 00000 C9 00000 C10 00000
C11 00000 C12 00000 C11 00000 C12 00000 C11 00000 C12 00000

104
MANU _08 MANU _08 MANU _08
N° Avviamenti Starting n° B Anlaufanzahl
C13 00000 C14 00000 C13 00000 C14 00000 C13 00000 C14 00000
C15 00000 C16 00000 C15 00000 C16 00000 C15 00000 C16 00000

Like in the previous group, the presence of these templates and their lines depends on the type of the unit in which
the control is installed. Here is displayed the number of start-ups of each component mentioned. The control records
the operation hours individually but recording every three units which means that, in case of lack of voltage before
recording, when the control is restarted it will begin counting from the last record.

MANU _09 MANU _09 MANU _09

GSM MODEM GSM MODEM GSM MODEM
Stato: Status:
Inizializzazione Initialisation field:
000%
Campo:000%

This template is displayed when the serial card for the GSM modem is present.
In the third line will be displayed various messages related to modem operation status and in the fourth, the field
presence.
In fact, the software also provides the control of an analog modem which has never been tested because its use is
not provided.
If you use an analog modem, the tests are different.

MANU _11 MANU _11 MANU _11

Password Password Wartungspasswort
Manutenzione Maintenance eingeben
00000 00000 00000

From this template you can access the protected templates of this branch by setting the correct password.

MANU _12 MANU _12 MANU _12

Abilitazione Enable Freigabe
Comp.1 N Comp.2 N Comp.1 N Comp.2 N Komp.1 N Komp.2 N
Comp.3 N Comp.4 N Comp.3 N Comp.4 N Komp.3 N Komp.4 N
Comp.5 N Comp.6 N Comp.5 N Comp.6 N Komp.5 N Komp.6 N

MANU _13 MANU _13 MANU _13

Abilitazione Enable Freigabe
Comp.7 N Comp.8 N Comp.7 N Comp.8 N Komp.7 N Komp.8 N
Comp.9 N Comp.10 N Comp.9 N Comp.10 N Komp.9 N Komp.10 N
Comp.11 N Comp.12 N Comp.11 N Comp.12 N Komp.11 N Komp.12 N

MANU _14 MANU _14 MANU _14

Abilitazione Enable Freigabe
Comp.13 N Comp.14 N Comp.13 N Comp.14 N Komp.13 N Komp.14 N
Comp.15 N Comp.16 N Comp.15 N Comp.16 N Komp.15 N Komp.16 N

The presence of these templates and their lines depends on the type of the unit in which the control is installed. Here
you can enable or disable the compressors' operation.
Moreover, in some configurations you must apply special enablments for the proper operation of the unit:
In the units with 4 compressors and 4 separate circuits, you should not enable the "Comp 2‖, ―Comp.4‖, ―Comp.6‖
and ―Comp.8‖.
In the units with 5 compressors you should not enable the "Comp. 3".
In the units with 7 compressors and 3 cooling circuits, you should not enable the "Comp 3‖ and ―Comp.6‖.
In the units with 10 compressors and 4 cooling circuits, you should not enable the "Comp 9‖ and ―Comp.12‖.

105
MANU _15 MANU _15 MANU _15
Abilitazione Enable Freigabe
Pompa1 N Pompa2 N Pump1 N Pump2 N Pumpe1 N Pumpe2 N
Pompa3 N PompaFC N Pump3 N PumpFC N Pumpe3 N PumpeFC N

This template, related to the pumps' presence, enables and disables their operation.

MANU _16 MANU _16 MANU _16

Reset Man.Unità N Reset unit Maint. N Reset Wart.Heiheit N
Comp.1 N Comp.2 N Comp.1 N Comp.2 N Komp.1 N Komp.2 N
Comp.3 N Comp.4 N Comp.3 N Comp.4 N Komp.3 N Komp.4 N
Comp.5 N Comp.6 N Comp.5 N Comp.6 N Komp.5 N Komp.6 N

MANU _17 MANU _17 MANU _17

Reset Manutenzione Reset Maintenance Reset Wartung
Comp.7 N Comp.8 N Comp.7 N Comp.8 N Komp.7 N Komp.8 N
Comp.9 N Comp.10 N Comp.9 N Comp.10 N Komp.9 N Komp.10 N
Comp.11 N Comp.12 N Comp.11 N Comp.12 N Komp.11 N Komp.12 N

MANU _18 MANU _18 MANU _18

Reset Manutenzione Reset Maintenance Reset Wartung
Comp.13 N Comp.14 N Comp.13 N Comp.14 N Komp.13 N Komp.14 N
Comp.15 N Comp.16 N Comp.15 N Comp.16 N Komp.15 N Komp.16 N

MANU _19 MANU _19 MANU _19

Reset Manutenzione Reset Maintenance Reset Wartung
Pompa1 N Pompa2 N Pump 1 N Pump 2 N Pumpe 1 N Pumpe 2 N
Pompa3 N PompaFC N Pump 3 N PumpFC N Pumpe 3 N PumpeFC N

In this template series, which is present according to the type of the unit where the control is installed, you can set to
zero the counter of the various components.

MANU _20 MANU _20 MANU _20

Taratura Ingressi Input calibration Eingang Einstellung
B1 +0.0 B2 +0.0 B1 +0.0 B2 +0.0 B1 +0.0 B2 +0.0
B3 +0.0 B4 +0.0 B3 +0.0 B4 +0.0 B3 +0.0 B4 +0.0
B5 +0.0 B6 +0.0 B5 +0.0 B6 +0.0 B5 +0.0 B6 +0.0

MANU _21 MANU _21 MANU _21

Taratura Ingressi Inlet calibration Eingang Einstellung
B7 +0.0 B8 +0.0 B7 +0.0 B8 +0.0 B7 +0.0 B8 +0.0
B9 +0.0 B10 +0.0 B9 +0.0 B10 +0.0 B9 +0.0 B10 +0.0
B11 +0.0 B12 +0.0 B11 +0.0 B12 +0.0 B11 +0.0 B12 +0.0

MANU _22 MANU _22 MANU _22

Taratura Ingressi Inlet calibration Eingang Einstellung
B13 +0.0 B14 +0.0 B13 +0.0 B14 +0.0 B13 +0.0 B14 +0.0
B15 +0.0 B16 +0.0 B15 +0.0 B16 +0.0 B15 +0.0 B16 +0.0
B17 +0.0 B18 +0.0 B17 +0.0 B18 +0.0 B17 +0.0 B18 +0.0

MANU _23 MANU _23 MANU _23

Taratura Ingressi Inlet calibration Eingang Einstellung
B19 +0.0 B20 +0.0 B19 +0.0 B20 +0.0 B19 +0.0 B20 +0.0
B21 +0.0 B21 +0.0 B21 +0.0

In this series of templates, present according to the type of unit in which the control is installed, you can calibrate the
read of each analog input in order to eliminate any error due to the degree of precision of the relative probes.
The label "B" corresponds to the name of the card terminals.

106
MANU _24 MANU _24 MANU _24
Ripristino HP 4 HP resets 4 HD Einstellung 4
Intervallo 60m Interval 60m Zeit 60m
Ripristino LP 4 LP resets 4 ND Einstellung 4
Intervallo 60m Interval 60m Zeit 60m

MANU _25 MANU _25 MANU _25

Ripristino Th.Comp.2 Overl.comp.reset 2 Therm.Komp.Reset 2
Intervallo 60m Interval 60m Zeit 60m

In these templates you can set the number of automatic resets for the high and low pressure alarms and
compressors' thermal safety switches.
When the number of alarms within the set time slot is reached, the alarms can be reset manually.

MANU _26 MANU _26 MANU _26

Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L
01-1 04-1 07-1 10-1 01-1 04-1 07-1 10-1 01-1 04-1 07-1 10-1
02-1 05-1 08-1 11-1 02-1 05-1 08-1 11-1 02-1 05-1 08-1 11-1
03-1 06-1 09-1 12-1 03-1 06-1 09-1 12-1 03-1 06-1 09-1 12-1

MANU _27 MANU _27 MANU _27

Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L Gr-L
13-1 16-1 13-1 16-1 13-1 16-1
14-1 17-1 14-1 17-1 14-1 17-1
15-1 15-1 15-1

In these templates you can change the alarm group. The change is limited within the specified values.

MANU _28 MANU _28 MANU _28

Numero allarmi per Number of alarm Alarm Anzahl fuer
Passaggio livello for changing level neachstes Niveau
00 all. per L2 a L1 00 all. from L2 a L1 00 Al.von L2 bis L1
00 all. per L3 a L2 00 all. from L3 a L2 00 Al.von L3 bis L2

In this template you can set the number of alarms of a level required for signalling the number of alarms of an upper
level.

BMS_MODEM_01 BMS_MODEM_01 BMS_MODEM_01

Enable Modem: No Enable Modem: No Enable Modem: No
Modem Password: 0000 Modem Password: 0000 Modem Password: 0000
Analog Analog Analog
Enable Send SMS: No Enable Send SMS: No Enable Send SMS: No

BMS_MODEM_02 BMS_MODEM_02 BMS_MODEM_02

Numbers to store: 1 Numbers to store: 1 Numbers to store: 1
Phone num. index: 1 Phone num. index: 1 Phone num. index: 1
insert the number: insert the number: insert the number:

BMS_MODEM_03 BMS_MODEM_03 BMS_MODEM_03

Rings before call: 0 Rings before call: 0 Rings before call: 0
Rpt same number: 0 Rpt same number: 0 Rpt same number: 0
Time to double for Time to double for Time to double for
retrying 0s retrying 0s retrying 0s

BMS_MODEM_04 BMS_MODEM_04 BMS_MODEM_04

Max time for double Max time for double Max time for double
Rpt same number: 00s Rpt same number: 00s Rpt same number: 00s
Stored phone numbers Stored phone numbers Stored phone numbers
rpt.before retry: 0 rpt.before retry: 0 rpt.before retry: 0

This series of templates is related to the modem use. Here you can set the parameters given for its control.

107
MANU_32 MANU_32 MANU_32
Controllo Resa No Field control N Leistungsregelung N
Reset Risc.Olio No Carter heater res.N Olheizung Reset N
Avviamento da fare Start Up To be done Inbetriebab.Z.machen
data avv.to 00/00/00 date 00/00/00 datum 00/00/00

In this template you can enable the yield control using the parameters set in the ―SERV_10‖ template and avoid
waiting for the oil in the compressor crankcase to heat.
After setting the oil heating delay to zero, if the unit is once again not powered, the control will respect the new
heating time according to the black-out time.
In the last two lines you must set the start-up completed and the relative date.

MANU_33 MANU_33 MANU_33

Set limitazione Set Stron Begrenzung
Corrente 000A Current limitat 000A 000O

This template is related to the presence of the absorbed current limitation. Here you must set the current set point
which must not be exceeded by the unit power absorption.

MANU_14_DRV1 MANU_14_DRV1 MANU_14_DRV1

Taratura ingr.drv 1 DRV 1 inlet offset DRV 1 Eing.Einstel
Press 0.0 Temp 0.0 Press-0.0 Temp-0.0 Druck-0.0 Temp-0.0
Taratura ingr.drv 2 DRV 2 inlet offset DRV 2 Eing.Einstel
Press 0.0 Temp 0.0 Press-0.0 Temp-0.0 Druck-0.0 Temp-0.0

MANU_14_DRV2 MANU_14_DRV2 MANU_14_DRV2

Taratura ingr.drv 3 DRV 3 inlet offset DRV 3 Eing.Einstel
Press 0.0 Temp 0.0 Press-0.0 Temp-0.0 Druck-0.0 Temp-0.0
Taratura ingr.drv 4 DRV 4 inlet offset DRV 4 Eing.Einstel
Press 0.0 Temp 0.0 Press-0.0 Temp-0.0 Druck-0.0 Temp-0.0

MANU_14_DRV3 MANU_14_DRV3 MANU_14_DRV3

Taratura ingr.drv 5 DRV 5 inlet offset DRV 5 Eing.Einstel
Press 0.0 Temp 0.0 Press-0.0 Temp-0.0 Druck-0.0 Temp-0.0
Taratura ingr.drv 6 DRV 6 inlet offset DRV 6 Eing.Einstel
Press 0.0 Temp 0.0 Press-0.0 Temp-0.0 Druck-0.0 Temp-0.0

MANU_14_DRV4 MANU_14_DRV4 MANU_14_DRV4

Taratura ingr.drv 7 DRV 7 inlet offset DRV 7 Eing.Einstel
Press 0.0 Temp 0.0 Press-0.0 Temp-0.0 Druck-0.0 Temp-0.0
Taratura ingr.drv 8 DRV 8 inlet offset DRV 8 Eing.Einstel
Press 0.0 Temp 0.0 Press-0.0 Temp-0.0 Druck-0.0 Temp-0.0

In this series of templates, related to the presence of the electronic expansion valves, you can set the reading of the
driver pressure and temperature probes.

MANU_21_DVR MANU_21_DVR MANU_21_DVR

Modo Driver 1 AUTO Driver 1 mode AUTO Typ Driver 1 AUTO
Passi apertura 0000 Opening steps 0000 Offns Teilung 0000
Passi attuali 0000 Present steps 0000 Laufende Teilung0000

MANU_22_DVR MANU_22_DVR MANU_22_DVR

Modo Driver 2 AUTO Driver 2 mode AUTO Typ Driver 2 AUTO
Passi apertura 0000 Opening steps 0000 Offns Teilung 0000
Passi attuali 0000 Present steps 0000 Laufende Teilung0000

MANU_23_DVR MANU_23_DVR MANU_23_DVR

Modo Driver 3 AUTO Driver 3 mode AUTO Typ Driver 3 AUTO
Passi apertura 0000 Opening steps 0000 Offns Teilung 0000
Passi attuali 0000 Present steps 0000 Laufende Teilung0000

108
MANU_24_DVR MANU_24_DVR MANU_24_DVR
Modo Driver 4 AUTO Driver 4 mode AUTO Typ Driver 4 AUTO
Passi apertura 0000 Opening steps 0000 Offns Teilung 0000
Passi attuali 0000 Present steps 0000 Laufende Teilung0000

MANU_25_DVR MANU_25_DVR MANU_25_DVR

Modo Driver 5 AUTO Driver 5 mode AUTO Typ Driver 5 AUTO
Passi apertura 0000 Opening steps 0000 Offns Teilung 0000
Passi attuali 0000 Present steps 0000 Laufende Teilung0000

MANU_26_DVR MANU_26_DVR MANU_26_DVR

Modo Driver 6 AUTO Driver 6 mode AUTO Typ Driver 6 AUTO
Passi apertura 0000 Opening steps 0000 Offns Teilung 0000
Passi attuali 0000 Present steps 0000 Laufende Teilung0000

MANU_27_DVR MANU_27_DVR MANU_27_DVR

Modo Driver 7 AUTO Driver 7 mode AUTO Typ Driver 7 AUTO
Passi apertura 0000 Opening steps 0000 Offns Teilung 0000
Passi attuali 0000 Present steps 0000 Laufende Teilung0000

MANU_28_DVR MANU_28_DVR MANU_28_DVR

Modo Driver 8 AUTO Driver 8 mode AUTO Typ Driver 8 AUTO
Passi apertura 0000 Opening steps 0000 Offns Teilung 0000
Passi attuali 0000 Present steps 0000 Laufende Teilung0000

In this series of templates related to the presence of electronic expansion valves you can force the opening of each
valve.
By setting "AUTO" in the first line, the valve opening will be controlled automatically or, by setting "MANU", the valve
will open according to the value set in the second line.
The third line contains the actual number of the opening steps.

MANU_29 MANU_29 MANU_29

Valv.Custom passi Steps valv.Custom Kunde Teilungsv.
Min 0000 Max 0000 Min 0000 Max 0000 Min 0000 Max 0000
Chiu 0000 Close 0000 Schl 0000

MANU_30 MANU_30 MANU_30

Valv.Custom exsteps Exsteps Custom valve Kunde exstepsv.
Apertura No Opening steps N Offnen N
Chiusura No Closing N Schluss N

MANU_31 MANU_31 MANU_31

Valv.Custom Corrente Present custom valve Laufende Kunde V.
In movimento 0000mA moving 0000mA Bewegung 0000mA
In Stand-by 0000mA Stand-by 0000mA Auf Stand-by 0000mA

MANU_32 MANU_32 MANU_32

Valv.Custom Custom valve Kunde Ventil
Frequenza 000Hz Frequency 000Hz Frequenz 000Hz
Duty-cycle 000% Duty-cycle 000 % Duty-cycle 000 %

These four templates are present when the control is asked to manage expansion valves, other than those already
provided in the software.
In this case, you must set "CUSTOM" in the fourth line of the ―COST_21_DRV‖ in the Manufacturer branch, in the
valve model section.
In order to control them, you must know and enter correctly all the parameters given in the templates.

109
MANU_33 MANU_33 MANU_33
Batteria No Battery N Batterie N
Rapporto percent. Ratio percentage Prozentfaktor
Circ.EVV 000% Circ.EVV 000% EVV Schaltung 000%

In this template you must set the presence or absence of the buffer coil and the ratio between the valve and cooling
circuit power, under nominal operating conditions.
The value set allows the valve quick pre-positioning at the cooling circuit start-up, then the regulation is carried out
with the parameters set in the following templates.
If you have any doubts regarding the value of the ratio to be set, we recommend that you enter a smaller value rather
than a bigger one.
By setting a smaller value you prevent the valve from opening too much at start-up, which may lead to low refrigerant
level, overheating and possible fluid return.

MANU_34 MANU_34 MANU_34

Param. Comun-CH CH comon parameter CH Gemeinsam Param.
Protezione LOP LOP protection LOP Schutz
Soglia LOP -08.0°C LOP thres. -08.0°C LOP Grenze -08.0°C
Tempo int. 010s Int. time 010s Int.Zeit 010s

MANU_35 MANU_35 MANU_35

Param. Comun-HP HP comon parameter DF comon parameter
Protezione LOP LOP protection LOP protection
Soglia LOP -22.0°C LOP thres. -22.0°C LOP thres. -22.0°C

MANU_36 MANU_36 MANU_36

Param. Comun-DF HP Gemeinsam Param. DF Gemeinsam Param.
Protezione LOP LOP Schutz LOP Schutz
Soglia LOP -16.0°C LOP Grenze -16.0°C LOP Grenze -16.0°C

In these templates you must set the low pressure operating limits under different operating conditions, expressed in
the temperature of the relative refrigerant.
In the first template of this series, you must set the integration time common to all operating conditions, on the
following control, to bring the value read above the threshold.
Greater values of the integration time result in slower reaction.

MANU_37 MANU_37 MANU_37

Param. Comun-CH CH comon parameter CH Gemeinsam Param.
Soglia MOP 12.0°C MOP thres. 12.0°C MOP Grenze 12.0°C
Tempo int. 100s Int. time 100s Int.Zeit 100s
Ritard.allarme 0100s Alarm delay 0100s Verzoeg.Alarm 0100s

MANU_38 MANU_38 MANU_38

Param. Comun-HP HP comon parameter HP Gemeinsam Param.
Soglia MOP 40.0°C MOP thres. 40.0°C MOP Grenze 40.0°C

MANU_39 MANU_39 MANU_39

Param. Comun-DF DF comon parameter DF Gemeinsam Param.
Soglia MOP 40.0°C MOP thres. 40.0°C MOP Grenze 40.0°C

Like the low pressure limit of the previous group of templates, in these templates you must set the high pressure
limits under different operating conditions, expressed in the temperature of the relative refrigerant.
The integration time necessary for respecting the set value and the alarm signalling delay is the same for all the
operating conditions.

110
MANU_40 MANU_40 MANU_40
Alta temperatura Evaporation high Hochtemperatur
Aspirazione temperature Absaugen
CH 40.0°C CH 40.0°C CH 40.0°C
HP 40.0°C DF 40.0°C HP 40.0°C DF 40.0°C HP 40.0°C DF 40.0°C

In this template you must enter the threshold value read by the temperature probe for which the control enables the
alarm.

MANU_41 MANU_41 MANU_41

Funz. CH Sheat CH Sheat working CH S.heat Betrieb
Set 6.0°CBanda 0.0°C Set 6.0°Cdiff.0.0°C Set 6.0°CDiff.0.0°C
Guad.Prop. 00.0 Prop.gain 00.0 Prop.gain 00.0
T.Int.000s Der.0.0s Int.T.000s Der.0.0s Int.Z 000s Abl.0.0s

MANU_42 MANU_42 MANU_42

Funz. DF Sheat HP Sheat working HP S.heat Betrieb
Set 6.0°C Set 6.0°C Set 6.0°C
Guad.Prop. 00.0 Prop.gain 00.0 Prop.gain 00.0
T.Int.000s Int. Time 000s Int.Zeit 000s

MANU_43 MANU_43 MANU_43

Funz. DF Sheat DF Sheat working DF S.heat Betrieb
Set 6.0°C Set 6.0°C Set 6.0°C
Guad.Prop. 00.0 Prop.gain 00.0 Prop.gain 00.0
T.Int.000s Int. Time 000s Int.Zeit 000s

In this template you must set the overheating value, which the control must keep under different operating
conditions, and their parameters.
The regulation range and the derivative time set in the cooling mode operation (CH) are also common to the heating
mode (HP) and the heat pumps' defrost (DF).
The range, which is set on the set point, defines the heating interval for which the control does not intervene.
The value may also be set to zero.
The proportional gain is the number of steps with which the control opens or closes the valve to change the
overheating with one degree; Greater values result in faster opening; the size of the value must be considered with
the total number of steps of the controlled valve.
The integral time is the delay with which the control corrects the value read; Higher values of integral time result in
slower actions.
The derivative time counteracts the sudden variations of the read value. Greater values of the derivative time result
in more energetic regulations.
In short, during the general operation within the range, the control is not involved in the regulation if the value read is
1 degree Celsius higher than the set point; the control intervenes mainly with the adjustment given by the
proportional gain; for variations below 1 degree Celsius, the parameters with which the control intervenes are the
integral and the derivative time.

MANU_44 MANU_44 MANU_44

Soglia Threshold Grenze
Basso SH 3.0°C Low SH 3.0°C Nieder.SH 3.0°C
Temp. Integr. 4.0s Integr. time 4.0s Integ.Zeit 4.0s

In this template you must set the low overheating limit and the relative integration time.

MANU_45 MANU_45 MANU_45

Stato driver 1 Driver 1 status Driver 1 Zustand

NESSUNA ANOMALIA NO ANOMALY NO ANOMALY

No N N

MANU_46 MANU_46 MANU_46

Stato driver 2 Driver 2 status Driver 2 Zustand

NESSUNA ANOMALIA NO ANOMALY NO ANOMALY

No N N

111
MANU_47 MANU_47 MANU_47
Stato driver 3 Driver 3 status Driver 3 Zustand

NESSUNA ANOMALIA NO ANOMALY NO ANOMALY

No N N

MANU_48 MANU_48 MANU_48

Stato driver 4 Driver 4 status Driver 4 Zustand

NESSUNA ANOMALIA NO ANOMALY NO ANOMALY

No N N

MANU_49 MANU_49 MANU_49

Stato driver 5 Driver 5 status Driver 5 Zustand

NESSUNA ANOMALIA NO ANOMALY NO ANOMALY

No N N

MANU_50 MANU_50 MANU_50

Stato driver 6 Driver 6 status Driver 6 Zustand

NESSUNA ANOMALIA NO ANOMALY NO ANOMALY

No N N

MANU_51 MANU_51 MANU_51

Stato driver 7 Driver 7 status Driver 7 Zustand

NESSUNA ANOMALIA NO ANOMALY NO ANOMALY

No N N

MANU_52 MANU_52 MANU_52

Stato driver 8 Driver 8 status Driver 8 Zustand

NESSUNA ANOMALIA NO ANOMALY NO ANOMALY

No N N

These templates are read only. Here is indicated if there are any anomalies in the driver operation.

112
7.2.3 GSM Templates
When alarms or signals occur, the control stores the templates and, if the GSM modem control card is present, it will
send them via SMS message.
You have to scroll through the menu selections using the up/ down arrow keys until the double sized writing "GSM"
is displayed in the centre and press "enter" to confirm.
Both procedures lead to the first template of the branch where the password is required.

m_pass_gsm m_pass_gsm m_pass_gsm

Password Gsm Gsm password Gsm Passwort
00000 00000 '00000

The default password for entering the stored templates is ―00400‖.

After having entered the correct password and confirmed it with "enter" you will access the last template stored.
By using the arrow keys you can scroll through the other templates.
The templates' loop increases automatically with each new alarm arrived until reaching 150. The next alarms will be
recorded by deleting the old ones.
The date and time shown on the template allow the reconstruction of the chronological order.

m_history_al m_history_al m_history_al

00/00/00 00:00 N°000 00/00/00 00:00 N°000 00/00/00 00:00 N°000
Evento Event: Ereignes:
Nessun allarme No Alarm No Alarm

This is the type of template that appears only when the alarm templates' loop is empty. When the template refers to
an alarm, on the first line will appear the date, time and a progressive number; in the last two will be displayed the
alarm tripped.

113
7.2.4 Clock Templates

In the "Clock" branch you can read the current time and set the exact time if necessary.
To enter the "Clock" branch, you have to scroll through the options using the up/ down arrow keys until the double
sized writing "Clock" is displayed in the centre and press "enter" to confirm.
After entering the branch, press an arrow key to access the template for setting the password.
The default password of the clock branch is 00001.
After having confirmed the correct password, use the up/ down arrow keys to reach the template for updating the
date and time.
If you remain for an interval of five minutes within the branch without pressing any key, the display returns
automatically to the first template of the menu branch.
The correct date and time are essential to control the alarm history.

M_OROL_01 M_OROL_01 M_OROL_01

Data 00/00/00 Date 00/00/00 Datum00/00/00
gg/mm/yy dd/mm/yy TT/MM/JJ
Ora 00:00 Time 00:00 Uhr 00:00
hh:mm hh:mm UU:MM

In this template are displayed the correct date and time.

M_OROL_02 M_OROL_02 M_OROL_02

Password Orologio Clock Password Uhr Passwort
00000 00000 00000

In this template you must set the password for entering the template that allows you to correct the date and time.

M_OROL_03 M_OROL_03 M_OROL_03

Data 00/00/00 Date 00/00/00 Datum00/00/00
gg/mm/yy dd/mm/yy TT/MM/JJ
Ora 00:00 Hour 00:00 Uhr 00:00
hh:mm hh:mm UU:MM

In this template you can set the correct date and time.

M_OROL_04 M_OROL_04 M_OROL_04

Abilit.secondo Fans speed control Freigabe 2° sollwert
set condensaz. second set enabled drehzahlregler
L M M G V S D M T W T F S S M D M D F S S
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N

In this template you can set the days of the week during which the second set of parameters, for fan speed control,
will be active.

M_OROL_05 M_OROL_05 M_OROL_05

Inizio set 1 Start set 1 Start Sollwert 1
08:00 e 16:00 08:00 e 16:00 08:00 e 16:00
Inizio set 2 Start set 2 Start Sollwert 2
12:00 e 20:00 12:00 e 20:00 12:00 e 20:00

In this template you must set the start times of the two sets of parameters when the second is also provided.
During the days in which the second set of parameters is not provided, the control will operate with the first set.

114
7.2.5 Menu Templates

In the "Menu" branch are available all the general parameters related to unit operation.
The branch can be accessed from any template by pressing "Esc" or, by pressing "prg" and entering the
"M_MAIN_SCROLL" template, scroll through the options with the up/ down arrow keys until the double sized "Menu"
wording will appear in the centre of the display and confirm with "enter".
Once you have accessed the branch, you can scroll through the templates using the "up/down arrow keys".
Except for the main ―MENU_1‖ template, the other templates are related to the enabled functions.

MENU_01 MENU_01 MENU_01

Acqua Rif.to 00.0°C Ref.Water 00.0°C Wasser Bezug 00.0°C
Set 00.0°C Set 00.0°C Sollwert 00.0°C
UnitàOff da tasto Unit Off by key GeraetAus von Taste
Funzion.Chiller Chiller operation Betrieb Chiller

In this template you can read the reference water temperature for the cooling unit operation, the set point, the
operation status (it will be shown, even if the unit has been turned off from the digital input or the supervisory
system) and the operation type.
This template is displayed at unit start-up and the one to which the program returns automatically.

MENU_02 MENU_02 MENU_02

Parzializzazione Unload Aktive aufgezogen
Forzata Attiva forcing Teillast

The template will appear in the loop when the circuits will operate with forced capacity reduction, regardless of the
forcing type.

MENU_03 MENU_03 MENU_03

Unita' Unit is Einheit mit Abtauen
con sbrinamento defrosting im lauf
in corso

This template appears in the loop only for the heat pump units, while a defrost cycle is in progress.

MENU_04 MENU_04 MENU_04

Funzionamento con Dual Set Point Doppelsollwert
Doppio Set Point Operating Mode Betrieb
Attivo Set Operation Sollwert aktiv
ALTO 00.0°C HIGH Set 00.0°C HOCH 00.0°C

This template only appears if the dual set point operation has been provided. The active set point and its value can
be read.

MENU_05 MENU_05 MENU_05

Circuito Utilizzo Dual set point Benutzer Kreis
T.decremento 00000 Delay Unload 00000s Neg.Regel.Zeit00000s
T.incremento 00000 Delay Load 00000s Pos.Regel.Zeit00000s
|Zona Morta| |Dead Zone| |Neutral Band|

This template only appears when the output temperature function is enabled. You can read the power increase/
decrease delay times waited by the control when the reference water temperature has exceeded the dead zone.
When the reference water temperature is beyond the dead zone an asterisk will appear on the last line.

115
MENU_06 MENU_06 MENU_06
Richiesta 000% Demand 000% Anfrage 000%
Compres. attivi Comp.working Verdichter im Lauf

The first line contains the operation percentage required by the plant, which corresponds to the temperature read by
the reference probe with respect to the set point and differential.
The first line of the template does not appear in the units with output control.
The third line shows the running compressors.

MENU_07 MENU_07 MENU_07

Set Point 00.0°C Set Point 00.0°C Sollweret 00.0°C
Antigelo 00.0°C Antigelo 00.0°C Frostch 00.0°C
Temp.Massima 00.0°C Temp.Massima 00.0°C Max Temperat.00.0°C

The loop of the units provided with output control contains this template, which shows some operating values.
The maximum temperature is achieved by adding the set point to the dead zone and the start-up differential.

MENU_08 MENU_08 MENU_08

Set Point 00.0°C Set Point 00.0°C Sollweret 00.0°C
Limi.H.Temp. 00.0°C High T.limit 00.0°C Max.Hoch Temp.00.0°C
Temp.Minima 00.0°C Min.temperat.00.0°C Min.Temperat. 00.0°C

The loop of the heat pump units with output control, during winter operation, contains this template instead of the
previous one.
The minimum temperature is achieved by subtracting the dead zone and the heat pump mode start-up differential
from the set point.

MENU_09 MENU_09 MENU_09

Free Cooling Free Cooling Freie Kuehlung
Spento Off Geloscht

In the units provided with free cooling system appear in this template where you can check if the system is running
or not.

MENU_10 MENU_10 MENU_10

Recupero Recovery WRGewinnungs
Spento Off Geloscht

The units provided with heat recovery system appear in this template where you can check if the system is running
or not.

MENU_11 MENU_11 MENU_11

Primo set First set Erste Sollwert
controllo fans speed Kondensations
condensazione control Druck Regelung

This template will only appear in the loop if the second set of parameters, which control the fan speed during
compressors' operation, is provided.
This template will show which set of parameters is enabled.

116
7.2.6 Set Templates

In the "Set" branch you can set all the main operating parameters.
To access the "SET" branch, scroll through the template options using the arrow keys until on the centre of the
display will appear the double sized message "SET". Confirm with "enter".
Once you have accessed the branch, you can scroll through the templates using the up/ down arrow keys.
If you remain for an interval of five minutes within the branch without pressing any key, the display returns to the first
template of the menu branch.

SET_01 SET_01 SET_01

Set Point Funz.to Set Point operation Sollwert Arbeit
Chiller 10.0°C Chiller 10.0°C Sommer 10.0°C
Pompa Calore 40.0°C Heat pump 40.0°C Winter 40.0°C
Acqua Recup. 40.0°C Recovery water 40.0°C WRG 40.0°C

In this template you can set, depending on the unit functions, the relative operation set points.

SET_02 SET_02 SET_02

Selezione Set Point Dual Set Point Sel. Auswahl Sollwert
ALTO HIGH HOCH

This template only appears if the dual set point operation is provided and the set point can be changed from the
keyboard. Therefore, the set point can be changed from "HIGH" to "LOW" and vice versa.

SET_3 SET_3 SET_3

Impostaz. Set Point Set Point Sollwert Einstellung
ALTO 10.0°C HIGH 00.0°C HOCH 00.0°C
BASSO -05.0°C LOW 00.0°C NIEDRIG 00.0°C

This template will appear instead of the ―SET_01‖ template only if the dual set point operation has been provided
and here you will be able to change the set points.

SET_4 SET_4 SET_4

Impost.Funzionamento Working mode Betriebseinstellung
ESTATE SUMMER SOMMER

This template appears in the heat pump units if the "Summer/Winter" mode can be switched from the keyboard.

117
7.2.7 I/O Templates

In the ―I/O‖ branch is shown the status of all digital/ analog inputs and outputs.
To access the "I/O" branch, scroll through the template options using the arrow keys until on the centre of the
display will appear the double sized message "I/O". Confirm with "enter".
Once you have accessed the branch, you can scroll through the templates using the "up/down arrow keys".
If you remain for an interval of five minutes within the branch without pressing any key, the display returns to the first
template of the menu branch.

I/O_01 I/O_01 I/O_01

Temperatura acqua Water temperature Wassertemperatur
Riferimento 00.0°C Reference 00.0°C Bezug 00.0°C
OUT Utiliz.1 00.0°C Outlet 1 00.0°C AUStritt 1 00.0°C
OUT Utiliz.2 00.0°C Outlet 2 00.0°C AUStritt 2 00.0°C

In this template you can read the temperatures of the reference and outgoing water. If there are two circuits, you can
read the output temperatures of both.

I/O_02 I/O_02 I/O_02

Temperatura acqua Water temperature Wassertemperatur
OUT Utiliz.3 00.0°C Outlet 3 00.0°C AUStritt 3 00.0°C
OUT Utiliz.4 00.0°C Outlet 4 00.0°C AUStritt 4 00.0°C
IN Recup. 00.0°C IN Recovery 00.0°C Ein WRGewin. 00.0°C

If the unit has 3 or 4 heat exchangers, in this template you can read the outgoing water temperature of each
exchanger; moreover, if the heat recovery is provided, you can read the heat exchanger incoming water
temperature.

I/O_02A I/O_02A I/O_02A

Temperatura acqua Water temperature Wassertemperatur
Perdere 1 00.0°C Well 1 00.0°C Brunnen 1 00.0°C
Perdere 2 00.0°C Well 2 00.0°C Brunnen 2 00.0°C

This template appears in the heat pump unit with one or two heat exchangers with water source, allowing you to
read the outgoing water temperature.

I/O_02B I/O_02B I/O_02B

Temperatura acqua Water temperature Wassertemperatur
Perdere 3 00.0°C Well 3 00.0°C Brunnen 3 00.0°C
Perdere 4 00.0°C Well 4 00.0°C Brunnen 4 00.0°C

Like in the previous case, this template appears when there are three or four source heat exchangers.

I/O_03 I/O_03 I/O_03

Temp. Aria 00.0°C Air Temp. 00.0°C Luft Temp. 00.0°C
Temp.1 Batt. 00.0°C Coil 1 Temp. 00.0°C Regist.1Temp 00.0°C
Temp.2 Batt. 00.0°C Coil 2 Temp. 00.0°C Regist.2Temp 00.0°C
Temp.Acq.Rit. 00.0°C Ret.wat.temp. 00.0°C Wassereintr. 00.0°C

This template is related to the functions of the heat pump with air source and free cooling.
The first line containing the air temperature is always present if at least one of the two functions is provided.
The temperature of the coils in the circuit one and two is present in the heat pump units with one or two sources,
while the return water temperature is present in free cooling units.

118
I/O_04 I/O_04 I/O_04
Temp.3 Batt. 00.0°C Coil 3 Temp. 00.0°C Regist.3Temp 00.0°C
Temp.4 Batt. 00.0°C Coil 4 Temp. 00.0°C Regist.4Temp 00.0°C

In this template, related to the heat pump units that comprise three or four air sources, you can read the values of
the coils' temperature.

I/O_05 I/O_05 I/O_05

Circuito 1 Circuit 1 Kreis 1
Hp 00.0b Lp 00.0b Hp 00.0b Lp 00.0b Hp 00.0b Lp 00.0b
D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C
B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C

I/O_06 I/O_06 I/O_06

Circuito 2 Circuit 2 Kreis 2
Hp 00.0b Lp 00.0b Hp 00.0b Lp 00.0b H 00.0b L 00.0b
D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C
B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C

I/O_07 I/O_07 I/O_07

Circuito 3 Circuit 3 Kreis 3
Hp 00.0b Lp 00.0b Hp 00.0b Lp 00.0b Hp 00.0b Lp 00.0b
D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C
B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C

I/O_08 I/O_08 I/O_08

Circuito 4 Circuit 4 Kreis 4
Hp 00.0b Lp 00.0b Hp 00.0b Lp 00.0b Hp 00.0b Lp 00.0b
D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C D 00.0°C
B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C B 00.0°C

These templates are related to the number of cooling circuits of the unit. Here you can read the high and low
pressure values and the value of the dew point temperature.
In the units that use refrigerant R407 you can also read the bubble value.

I/O_09 I/O_09 I/O_09

Stato Ingressi DGT DGT input status DGT Eingange Modus
Scheda Master Master Board Master Platine
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

I/O_10 I/O_10 I/O_10

Stato Ingressi DGT DGT input status DGT Eingange Modus
Scheda Slave slave board Slave Platine
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

I/O_10B I/O_10B I/O_10B

Stato Ingressi DGT DGT input status DGT Eingange Modus
Scheda Espansione expansion board Expansion Platine
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

In this series of templates you can see the status, close or open, of the digital inputs.
The templates of this branch are related to the presence of the relative cards.

I/O_11 I/O_11 I/O_11

Stato Uscite DGT DGT output status DGT Ausgange Modus
Scheda Master master board Master Platine
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

119
I/O_12 I/O_12 I/O_12
Stato Uscite DGT DGT output status DGT Ausgange Modus
Scheda Slave slave board Slave Platine
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

I/O_12B I/O_12B I/O_12B

Stato Uscite DGT DGT output status DGT Ausgange Modus
Scheda Espansione expansion board Zusatz Platine
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

As for inputs, this group of templates shows the status of the digital outputs.

I/O_13 I/O_13 I/O_13

Regol.Veloc. 1 000% Fan speed 1 000% DZR 1 000%
| | |
Regol.Veloc. 2 000% Fan speed 2 000% DZR 2 000%
| | |

I/O_14 I/O_14 I/O_14

Regol.Veloc. 3 000% Fan speed 3 000% DZR 3 000%
| | |
Regol.Veloc. 4 000% Fan speed 4 000% DZR 4 000%
| | |

Tou can read the value of the respective analog outputs for condensation control, in relation to the number of
source circuits present, in these templates

I/O_15 I/O_15 I/O_15

Valvola FC 000% Valve FC 000% Freiek. Ventil 000%
| | |
Valvola recup. 000% Recovery Valve 000% WRG Ventil 000%
| | |

Depending on the functions featured by the unit, the status of the analog outputs can be read.

I/O_15a I/O_15a I/O_15a

Uscita vent.free Fan external free Ausgang externe
Cooling esterno 000% cooling signal 000% freie kuehler 000%
| | |

In the units with external free cooling and continuous fan speed control this template allows you to see the
percentage of the signal that controls them.

I/O_16 I/O_16 I/O_16

Inverter Inverter Inverter

This template is provided for the use of inverters for compressor control.
Currently, this function has not been developed in the software.
The template is only present in the manual for internal use.

I/O_17 I/O_17 I/O_17

Corrente Absorbed Stromaufnahme
assorbita 0000.0 A current 0000.0 A 0000.0 O

With the control of the amp transformer it is possible to read the value of the current absorbed by the unit.

120
I/O_18_DRV I/O_18_DRV I/O_18_DRV
Circ.to 1 Valvola 1 Circuit 1 Valve 1 Kreis 1 Ventil.1
Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Teil 0000 SH 00.0°C
Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C
Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C

I/O_19_DRV I/O_19_DRV I/O_19_DRV

Circ.to 1 Valvola 2 Circuit 1 Valve 2 Kreis 1 Ventil.2
Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Teil 0000 SH 00.0°C
Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C
Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C

I/O_20_DRV I/O_20_DRV I/O_20_DRV

Circ.to 2 Valvola 3 Circuit 2 Valve 3 Kreis 2 Ventil.3
Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Teil 0000 SH 00.0°C
Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C
Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C

I/O_21_DRV I/O_21_DRV I/O_21_DRV

Circ.to 2 Valvola 4 Circuit 2 Valve 4 Kreis 2 Ventil.4
Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Teil 0000 SH 00.0°C
Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C
Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C

I/O_26_DRV I/O_26_DRV I/O_26_DRV

Circ.to 3 Valvola 1 Circuit 3 Valve 1 Kreis 3 Ventil.1
Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Teil 0000 SH 00.0°C
Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C
Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C

I/O_27_DRV I/O_27_DRV I/O_27_DRV

Circ.to 3 Valvola 2 Circuit 3 Valve 2 Kreis 3 Ventil.2
Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Teil 0000 SH 00.0°C
Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C
Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C

I/O_28_DRV I/O_28_DRV I/O_28_DRV

Circ.to 4 Valvola 3 Circuit 4 Valve 3 Kreis 4 Ventil.3
Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Teil 0000 SH 00.0°C
Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C
Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C

I/O_29_DRV I/O_29_DRV I/O_29_DRV

Circ.to 4 Valvola 4 Circuit 4 Valve 4 Kreis 4 Ventil.4
Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Steps 0000 SH 00.0°C Teil 0000 SH 00.0°C
Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C Evap 00.0b 00.0°C
Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C Tasp 00.0°C

These templates are related to the control of the electronic expansion vales.
In each template you can read a summary of the basic operating parameters, namely the number of valve opening
steps, the value of overheating, the evaporation pressure with its conversion in refrigerant temperature and the
temperature of the refrigerant.
The number of templates in the branch depends on the number of valves of the unit.
The reference between the circuits and valves refers to the table in the section "Local networks in tLan".

I/O_22_DRV I/O_22_DRV I/O_22_DRV

Vers.Firmware Firmware vers. Vers.Firmware
Circuito 1 Circuit 1 Kreis 1
Driver 1 000 000 Driver 1 000 000 Driver 1 000 000
Driver 2 --- --- Driver 2 --- --- Driver 2 --- ---

I/O_23_DRV I/O_23_DRV I/O_23_DRV

Vers.Firmware Firmware vers. Vers.Firmware
Circuito 2 Circuit 2 Kreis 2
Driver 3 000 000 Driver 3 000 000 Driver 3 000 000
Driver 4 --- --- Driver 4 --- --- Driver 4 --- ---

121
I/O_24_DRV I/O_24_DRV I/O_24_DRV
Vers.Firmware Firmware vers. Vers.Firmware
Circuito 3 Circuit 3 Kreis 3
Driver 1 000 000 Driver 1 000 000 Driver 1 000 000
Driver 2 --- --- Driver 2 --- --- Driver 2 --- ---

I/O_25_DRV I/O_25_DRV I/O_25_DRV

Vers.Firmware Firmware vers. Vers.Firmware
Circuito 4 Circuit 4 Kreis 4
Driver 3 000 000 Driver 3 000 000 Driver 3 000 000
Driver 4 --- --- Driver 4 --- --- Driver 4 --- ---

Like the previous templates, these templates are only present in the branch with the electronic expansion valve
control.
In this group of templates you can read the version of the driver software which controls the valves.

I/O_99 I/O_99 I/O_99

Unita' Multi_Compr. Multi_Compr. Unit Unita' Multi_Compr.
BLUE BOX BLUE BOX BLUE BOX
Cod. FLBBOMMTTF Cod. FLBBOMMTTF Cod. FLBBOMMTTF
Ver.00.0 00/00/00 Ver.00.0 00/00/00 Ver.00.0 00/00/00

The software identification data and its code, the version and the issue date of the control release are shown in this
template.

I/O_100 I/O_100 I/O_100

Data Collaudo Testing date Probelauf Datum
00/00/00 00/00/00 00/00/00
Codice Collaudatore Inspector code Pruefer Code
00000 00000 00000

In this template are indicated the unit testing date and the testing authority code.

7.2.8 Alarms

In the "Alarms" branch you can release each alarm that cannot be cancelled manually with the "alarm" key.
The branch can be accessed from any template by pressing the "prog" key. The template ―M_MAIN_SCROLL‖ will
be displayed for choosing the branch.
To access the "Alarms" branch, scroll through the template options using the arrow keys until on the centre of the
display will appear the double sized message "Alarms". Confirm with "enter".

ALL_00 ALL_00 ALL_00

Password allarmi Alarms password Alarme password
00000 00000 00000

After having entered the correct password you will be able to access the following templates that allow you to
remove the alarm manual cancelling lock.

122
7.2.9 History Branch
This section refers to the ―Winload32‖ program of the ―pco-manager‖, which enables the creation and input of the
file for historical data recording. For further information on this subject, please refer to the relative documentation.
The "History" branch contains information on the card control system, the real history and the identification number
of the card connected.
This information is controlled by the system "bios" and is in English only, regardless of the language chosen on the
control.
The branch can be accessed from any template by pressing the keys "alarm" and "enter" simultaneously for a few
seconds. The following template will be displayed.

> SYSTEM INFORMATION

LOG DATA
OTHER INFORMATION
-

On the right side of the template is present the symbol ">" which, by means of the arrow keys, can be moved onto
the three lines for accessing to the following menus.
By pressing "enter" when the symbol ">" is on the line "SYSTEM INFORMATION" will appear the template
containing information about the system.

BOOT V 4.03 03/07/06

BIOS V 4.30 22/12/08
>2+2MB<
APP. CRC: D1A3 2MB

This template, containing information about the system, must be interpreted as follows:
The first line indicates the current version and the issue date of the "boot" file of the card connected.
The second line indicates the current version and the issue date of the "bios" file of the card connected.
3
The third line contains the memory of the pCO card and that of the expansion card, if present.
The fourth line shows the software size expressed in hexadecimal numbers and the memory necessary for the
operation.
From this template, by pressing any key, you can return to the main menu.
Starting again from the branch access template following the procedure above, moving the symbol ">" on "LOG
DATA" line with the arrow keys and confirming with "enter", you will access the history records.
If you have not entered in the control memory a file for recording alarms and variables, it will appear the template

0
NO LOG DATA
PRESS
[MENU] OR [ESC]

If the file for history control has been successfully installed, the following template will be displayed.

1 DISPLAY LOG DATA

Which memory?

EXPANSION MEMORY

This is the first level of the templates that appear in the history.
Here you must choose the memory in which the history will be read. The memory may be in the internal or expansion
memory.
The history will be read in the memory where it has been installed. The installation option is chosen with the
"WinLoad" program when entering the data.
After the memory to be read has been chosen with the arrow keys, you must confirm with "enter" in order to access
the second level.

123
 2 DISPLAY LOG DATA
Which Log?

Xxxxxxxxxxx

At the second level you will be asked the history to be accessed.

You can choose to analyse the events or cyclic records' history, therefore, at a given frequency.
The last line shows the name of the history you can access by pressing "enter".
Using the up/ down arrow keys you can switch the history from events to cyclic records and vice versa.

3 DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXX
1 (0)

By choosing the events' history on the second level you will access the third level of which, the template above is an
example.
In the first line will appear the date and time when the event occurred.
In the second and third lines is a text related to the event. Given the reduced space available for the description and
it appears in English only, the text contains the number of the corresponding alarm template.
In the fourth template you can see if the recording is related to the alarm enablement or reset; In the example in the
figure, the status "1" stemming from "(0)" refers to the enablement, while the status "0" stemming from "(1)" refers to
the reset.
From this template, with the up arrow key, you can access the next event and with the down arrow key you will
access the previous event. By pressing "enter" you will move forward one level and the values recorded at the time
of the event are displayed.

4 DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXX
+000.0

In the templates of the fourth level you can see the values recorded at the moment the event occurred, of the
template corresponding to the previous level.
The first line of the template indicates the same date and time as the previous template, which refers to the
recording moment.
In the second and third templates is described the variable recorded related to the corresponding template.
The last line shows the value recorded.
From this template, using the up/ down arrow keys, you can scroll through all values recorded in the moment the
relative event occurred.
By pressing "enter" you will access the fifth level.

5
Log status: ENABLED

UP or DOWN: change

In the fifth level, which is common for both recording types, you can enable "ENABLED" or disable "DISABLED" the
records using the arrow keys.
Recording will be disabled when you need to keep the recorded data, for example, when you remove the expansion
memory card from the installation, for further analysis.

You have seen that from the second level, in addition to history and events, you can access the cyclic frequency
record.
In this case, from the second level, using the "enter" key, you can access the third level; below is shown a template
from this level.

124
 3 DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
UP : next record
DOWN : prev. record
ENTER : view data

In the first line appear the recording date and time; using the up arrow key you can access the next record; using the
down arrow key you will access the previous record and, with "enter" you will access the values recorded at the given
time and date.

4 DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXX
+000.0

In the templates of the fourth level you can see the values recorded at the given date and time, which are also
shown in the first line chosen in the template of the previous level.
In the second and third templates is described the variable recorded related to the corresponding template.
The last line shows the value recorded.
From this template you can scroll through all values of the records using the up/ down arrow keys.
By pressing "enter" you will access the fifth level which is the same as for the records and events.

After having completed the history analysis, from the main template of the branch that can be accessed following the
description at the beginning of the section, use the arrow keys and move the symbol ">" on line "OTHER
INFORMATION" and confirm with "enter " to access the template containing the identification data of the card
connected.

ID NUMBER :
XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

In the fields ―X‖ will be displayed the identification code.

125
7.3 Alarm templates
Any malfunction detected by the control will enable an alarm template.
The alarm templates enabled will only appear after pressing the "alarm" key.
When pressing the "alarm" key for the first time, any acoustic signal will be cancelled; the second time, the active
alarm template will appear or, if there is no active alarm, the "ALL_1" template will appear; when pressing for the
third time, you will cancel all the alarms.
When you are in an alarm template, you can scroll through all the other templates using the up/ down arrow keys.
If you remain for an interval of thirty minutes within the branch without pressing any key, the display returns to the
first template of the menu branch.

7.3.1 List of alarm templates

ALL_1 ALL_1 ALL_1

Nessun Allarme No Kein Alarm

Attivo Alarm aktiv

This template will appear if you press the "alarm" key twice and there is no alarm enabled.

ALL_2 ALL_2 ALL_2

Allarme Flow switch Alarm
Flussostato alarm Staemungswaechter

If the various delays set are observed, this template will appear when the digital input of the user water flow switch is
open. Its trip will prevent the compressors from starting, while any pump remains active. The alarm can be cancelled
manually only, from the keyboard.

ALL_3 ALL_3 ALL_3

Allarme Well water Alarm
Flussostato flow switch Stroemungswaechter
Sorgente alarm Kuehlwasser

The alarm appears when the relative digital input is open and at least one compressor is running. The alarm is
delayed and causes the unit compressors' arrest. The reset is manual.

ALL_4 ALL_4 ALL_4

Allarme Pump 1 overload Thermoschutzschalter
Termico pompa 1 Alarm Pumpe 1 Alarm

This template will be displayed instantly when the input of the pump 1 thermal breaker opens.
Depending on the number of pumps in the unit, with this alarm the control will operate differently:
It will stop the unit if there is only one pump;
It will start the other pump if there are two pumps;
Will force the reduction of the cooling circuits' capacity if this is the sole alarm of the pumps or it will stop the unit if
one of the other two pumps was already in alarm mode.
The alarm can be cancelled manually only, from the keyboard.

ALL_5 ALL_5 ALL_5

Allarme Pump 2 overload Thermoschutzschalter
Termico pompa 2 Alarm Pumpe 2 Alarm

This template will be displayed instantly when the input of the pump 2 thermal breaker opens.
Depending on the number of pumps in the unit, with this alarm the control will operate differently:
It will start the other pump if there are two pumps;

126
Will force the reduction of the cooling circuits' capacity if this is the sole alarm of the pumps or it will stop the unit if
one of the other two pumps was already in alarm mode.
The alarm can be cancelled manually only, from the keyboard.

ALL_141 ALL_141 ALL_141

Allarme Pump 3 overload Thermoschutzschalter
Termico pompa 3 Alarm Pumpe 3 Alarm

This template will be displayed instantly when the input of the pump 3 thermal breaker opens.
With this alarm, the control will force the reduction of the cooling circuits' capacity if this is the sole alarm of the
pumps or it will stop the unit if one of the other two pumps was already in alarm mode.
The alarm can be cancelled manually only, from the keyboard.

ALL_6 ALL_6 ALL_6

Allarme Pressure Alarm
Pressione Circuit 1 Druck
Circuito 1 Alarm Kreis 1

This template will appear if the digital input of the pressure switch on the circuit 1 delivery line is open or if the
pressure read by the transducer on the circuit 1 delivery line exceeds the alarm value.
This alarm acts the same for all cooling circuits, depending on the control set; the alarm can stop one compressor or
the entire cooling circuit; the alarm can be cancelled automatically for a limited number of trips over a certain period
of time, or manually.

ALL_7 ALL_7 ALL_7

Allarme Pressure Alarm
Pressione Circuit 2 Druck
Circuito 2 Alarm Kreis 2

ALL_8 ALL_8 ALL_8

Allarme Pressure Alarm
Pressione Circuit 3 Druck
Circuito 3 Alarm Kreis 3

ALL_9 ALL_9 ALL_9

Allarme Pressure Alarm
Pressione Circuit 4 Druck
Circuito 4 Alarm Kreis 4

For the other three circuits these templates correspond to the first tripped alarm.

ALL_10 ALL_10 ALL_10

Allarme Circuit 1 Alarm
Bassa Pressione Low Pressure Niederdruck
Circuito 1 Alarm Kreis 1

This template will appear if the pressure read by the suction line transducer of the circuit 1 drops below the alarm
value, depending on the active operation and after its delay.
This alarm acts the same for all cooling circuits, depending on the control set; the alarm can stop one compressor or
the entire cooling circuit; the alarm can be cancelled automatically for a limited number of trips over a certain period
of time, or manually.

127
ALL_11 ALL_11 ALL_11
Allarme Circuit 2 Alarm
Bassa Pressione Low Pressure Niederdruck
Circuito 2 Alarm Kreis 2

ALL_12 ALL_12 ALL_12

Allarme Circuit 3 Alarm
Bassa Pressione Low Pressure Niederdruck
Circuito 3 Alarm Kreis 3

ALL_13 ALL_13 ALL_13

Allarme Circuit 4 Alarm
Bassa Pressione Low Pressure Niederdruck
Circuito 4 Alarm Kreis 4

For the other three circuits these templates correspond to the first tripped alarm.

ALL_14 ALL_14 ALL_14

Allarme Compressor 1 Kompressor 1
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 1 protection alarm Alarm

The opening of the relative digital input will stop the compressor 1 immediately and this template will be displayed.
Depending on the control set, the alarm can be cancelled automatically for a limited number of times over a certain
period, or manually.
The control is the same for all compressors.
The manual cancellation of one of the compressor thermal breaker alarms will cancel any automatic interventions of
others as well.

ALL_15 ALL_15 ALL_15

Allarme Compressor 2 Kompressor 2
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 2 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_16 ALL_16 ALL_16

Allarme Compressor 3 Kompressor 3
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 3 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_17 ALL_17 ALL_17

Allarme Compressor 4 Kompressor 4
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 4 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_18 ALL_18 ALL_18

Allarme Compressor 5 Kompressor 5
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 5 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_19 ALL_19 ALL_19

Allarme Compressor 6 Kompressor 6
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 6 protection alarm Alarm

128
ALL_20 ALL_20 ALL_20
Allarme Compressor 7 Kompressor 7
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 7 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_21 ALL_21 ALL_21

Allarme Compressor 8 Kompressor 8
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 8 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_22 ALL_22 ALL_22

Allarme Compressor 9 Kompressor 9
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 9 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_23 ALL_23 ALL_23

Allarme Compressor 10 Kompressor 10
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 10 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_24 ALL_24 ALL_24

Allarme Compressor 11 Kompressor 11
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 11 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_25 ALL_25 ALL_25

Allarme Compressor 12 Kompressor 12
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 12 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_26 ALL_26 ALL_26

Allarme Compressor 13 Kompressor 13
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 13 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_27 ALL_27 ALL_27

Allarme Compressor 14 Kompressor 14
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 14 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_28 ALL_28 ALL_28

Allarme Compressor 15 Kompressor 15
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 15 protection alarm Alarm

ALL_29 ALL_29 ALL_29

Allarme Compressor 16 Kompressor 16
Protezioni Termiche thermal overload Thermoschutzschalter
Compressore 16 protection alarm Alarm

For the other compressors these templates correspond to the first tripped alarm.

129
ALL_30 ALL_30 ALL_30
Allarme Circuit 1 Stroermeldung
Termico Ventilatori fan protection Thermoschutzschalter
Circuito 1 alarm Kreis 1

The alarm will be displayed immediately when the digital input of the first cooling circuit fan thermal breakers is
open.
The alarm can only be cancelled manually.

ALL_31 ALL_31 ALL_31

Allarme Circuit 2 Stroermeldung
Termico Ventilatori fan protection Thermoschutzschalter
Circuito 2 alarm Kreis 2

ALL_32 ALL_32 ALL_32

Allarme Circuit 3 Stroermeldung
Termico Ventilatori fan protection Thermoschutzschalter
Circuito 3 alarm Kreis 3

ALL_33 ALL_33 ALL_33

Allarme Circuit 4 Stroermeldung
Termico Ventilatori fan protection Thermoschutzschalter
Circuito 4 alarm Kreis 4

These templates correspond to the thermal breakers of the other circuits' fans that tripped first.

ALL_34 ALL_34 ALL_34

Sequenza Fasi Phase sequence Falsche

Errata failure Phasen-Umschalting

The alarm appears when the voltage control input is enabled for checking the correct phase sequence and remains
opened for more than 60 seconds after supplying power to the control.
The alarm prevents the unit from starting and can only be cancelled by cutting off the power from the control.

ALL_35 ALL_35 ALL_35

Mancanza tensione Spannungsausfall
ausiliari Lacking Aux. Supply Steuerkreis

The alarm appears when the input of voltage control, enabled for checking its correct presence, is open.
The alarm stops the operations of the unit, which will start automatically with a delay in the new input closing.

ALL_36 ALL_36 ALL_36

Errata Comunicazione Failed Connection falsche Verbindung
tra schede in pLAN Between pLAN pLAN netz Platine
Boards

The alarm appears when the Master finds an inconsistency between the control configured via software and the
actual connection.

130
ALL_37 ALL_37 ALL_37

Orologio non Faulty Clock Uhr Stoerung

Funzionante

The alarm appears when the control detects that its own clock is not working properly.

ALL_38 ALL_38 ALL_38

Allarme Serial board alarm Stroermeldung
Scheda Seriale broken or not Schnistelle defekt
Rotta o non connessa connected oder nicht Anvesed

The alarm appears when the control finds inconsistencies between the values set via software and serial card
installed.

ALL_39 ALL_39 ALL_39

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Unit needs eingeben
Unità maintenance Geraet

This template appears when the unit operating hours have exceeded the value set for maintenance.
The alarm is for signalling only and does not interrupt the unit operation. It can only be cancelled from the
maintenance branch.

ALL_40 ALL_40 ALL_40

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 1 needs Wartung
Compressore 1 maintenance Kompressor 1

This template appears when the compressor 1 operating hours have exceeded the value set for maintenance.
The alarm is for signalling only and does not interrupt the compressor operation. It can only be cancelled from the
maintenance branch.

ALL_41 ALL_41 ALL_41

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 2 needs Wartung
Compressore 2 maintenance Kompressor 2

ALL_42 ALL_42 ALL_42

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 3 needs Wartung
Compressore 3 maintenance Kompressor 3

ALL_43 ALL_43 ALL_43

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 4 needs Wartung
Compressore 4 maintenance Kompressor 4

ALL_44 ALL_44 ALL_44

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 5 needs Wartung
Compressore 5 maintenance Kompressor 5

131
ALL_45 ALL_45 ALL_45
Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 6 needs Wartung
Compressore 6 maintenance Kompressor 6

ALL_47 ALL_47 ALL_47

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 7 needs Wartung
Compressore 7 maintenance Kompressor 7

ALL_48 ALL_48 ALL_48

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 8 needs Wartung
Compressore 8 maintenance Kompressor 8

ALL_49 ALL_49 ALL_49

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 9 needs Wartung
Compressore 9 maintenance Kompressor 9

ALL_50 ALL_50 ALL_50

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 10 needs Wartung
Compressore 10 maintenance Kompressor 10

ALL_51 ALL_51 ALL_51

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 11 needs Wartung
Compressore 11 maintenance Kompressor 11

ALL_52 ALL_52 ALL_52

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 12 needs Wartung
Compressore 12 maintenance Kompressor 12

ALL_53 ALL_53 ALL_53

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 13 needs Wartung
Compressore 13 maintenance Kompressor 13

ALL_54 ALL_54 ALL_54

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 14 needs Wartung
Compressore 14 maintenance Kompressor 14

ALL_55 ALL_55 ALL_55

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 15 needs Wartung
Compressore 15 maintenance Kompressor 15

132
ALL_56 ALL_56 ALL_56
Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Compressor 16 needs Wartung
Compressore 16 maintenance Kompressor 16

These templates are the signals of maintenance request for the other compressors, as seen for the first.

ALL_57 ALL_57 ALL_57

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Pump 1 needs Wartung
Pompa 1 maintenance Pumpe 1

ALL_58 ALL_58 ALL_58

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Pump 2 needs Wartung
Pompa 2 maintenance Pumpe 2

ALL_142 ALL_142 ALL_142

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione Pump 3 needs Wartung
Pompa 3 maintenance Pumpe 3

These templates are the signals of maintenance request for the pumps, as seen for the compressors.

ALL_118 ALL_118 ALL_118

Fine Sbrinamento End for limit time Gleichseitiege
Contemporaneo contemporary Abtauenende Nach
per Superato defrost Maximaler Zeit
Tempo Massimo

This template appears when a defrost cycle, reversing the cycle of the entire unit, ends after the maximum time has
elapsed.
The template disappears automatically after a defrost cycle has been completed correctly or you can cancel it
manually.

ALL_59 ALL_59 ALL_59

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Fine Sbrinamento Circuit 1 defrost Kreis 1
Superato Tempo End for Limit Time Abtauenende nach
Massimo Circuito 1 Overcoming Maximaler Zeit

ALL_60 ALL_60 ALL_60

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Fine Sbrinamento Circuit 2 defrost Kreis 2
Superato Tempo End for Limit Time Abtauenende nach
Massimo Circuito 2 Overcoming Maximaler Zeit

ALL_61 ALL_61 ALL_61

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Fine Sbrinamento Circuit 3 defrost Kreis 3
Superato Tempo End for Limit Time Abtauenende nach
Massimo Circuito 3 Overcoming Maximaler Zeit

ALL_62 ALL_62 ALL_62

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Fine Sbrinamento Circuit 4 defrost Kreis 4
Superato Tempo End for Limit Time Abtauenende nach
Massimo Circuito 4 Overcoming Maximaler Zeit

These templates are the signals for defrost cycle ended due to exceeded maximum time, corresponding to that
seen for contemporary defrost.

133
ALL_63 ALL_63 ALL_63
Segnalazione Warning Meldung
Funzionamento in Unit Running In Betrieb In
Bassa Efficienza Low Efficiency Nied.Leist.Fahigkeit

The signal appears during operation when the difference between the unit inlet and outlet temperature is beyond the
set value.
This signal does not cause any arrest.

ALL_64 ALL_64 ALL_64

Superata Soglia High temperature Hochtemp. Grenze
Alta Temperatura Threshold ueberschritten
Acqua Riferimento Overcome Wassereintritt
Utilizzo Reference Water Verbraucher

This alarm is enabled when the temperature of the reference water is higher than the maximum value set for the
summer operation and remains this way for a period of time greater than the "exceeded threshold delay" when the
unit is running.
The alarm causes the compressors' shutdown, while the pump keeps running. The alarm can be cancelled manually
at any time; the compressors will be ready to start again and the delay will be cancelled.

ALL_65 ALL_65 ALL_65

Superata Soglia Low temperature Niedertemp. Grenze
Bassa Temperatura Threshold ueberschritten
Acqua Riferimento Overcome Wassereintritt
Utilizzo Reference Water Verbraucher

This alarm is enabled when the temperature of the reference water is lower than the minimum value set for the
winter operation and remains this way for a period of time greater than the "exceeded threshold delay" when the unit
is running.
The alarm causes the compressors' shutdown, while the pump keeps running. The alarm can be cancelled manually
at any time; the compressors will be ready to start again and the delay will be cancelled.

ALL_66 ALL_66 ALL_66

Superata Soglia User Water Outlet 1 WasserAus Untergrenz
Bassa Temp.Acqua Low Temp.Threshold ueberschritten
Uscita Utlil.1:Ripr. Overcome: Manual Verbrau.1 Aus: man.
Manual.a Min. 00.0°C Reset at Min. 00.0°C Wiedereinsch. 00.0°C

ALL_67 ALL_67 ALL_67

Superata Soglia User Water Outlet 2 WasserAus Untergrenz
Bassa Temp.Acqua Low Temp.Threshold ueberschritten
Uscita Utlil.2:Ripr. Overcome: Manual Verbrau.2 Aus: man.
Manual.a Min. 00.0°C Reset at Min. 00.0°C Wiedereinsch. 00.0°C

ALL_68 ALL_68 ALL_68

Superata Soglia User Water Outlet 3 WasserAus Untergrenz
Bassa Temp.Acqua Low Temp.Threshold ueberschritten
Uscita Utlil.3:Ripr. Overcome: Manual Verbrau.3 Aus: man.
Manual.a Min. 00.0°C Reset at Min. 00.0°C Wiedereinsch. 00.0°C

ALL_69 ALL_69 ALL_69

Superata Soglia User Water Outlet 4 WasserAus Untergrenz
Bassa Temp.Acqua Low Temp.Threshold ueberschritten
Uscita Utlil.4:Ripr. Overcome: Manual Verbrau.4 Aus: man.
Manual.a Min. 00.0°C Reset at Min. 00.0°C Wiedereinsch. 00.0°C

This group of alarm templates appears when the temperature of the hydraulic circuit outgoing reference water is
below the lower operating limit set in the Service branch.
The alarm causes the shutdown of the relative hydraulic circuit compressors. The alarm can be reset manually
when the water temperature exceeds the tripping value plus the differential.

134
ALL_70 ALL_70 ALL_70
Superata Soglia Well Water Outlet 1 WasserAus Untergrenz
Bassa Temp.Acqua Low Temp.Threshold ueberschritten
Uscita Perd.1:Ripr. Overcome: Manual Brunnen 1 Aus: man.
Manual.a Min. 00.0°C Reset at Min. 00.0°C Wiedereinsch. 00.0°C

ALL_71 ALL_71 ALL_71

Superata Soglia Well Water Outlet 2 WasserAus Untergrenz
Bassa Temp.Acqua Low Temp.Threshold ueberschritten
Uscita Perd.2:Ripr. Overcome: Manual Brunnen 2 Aus: man.
Manual.a Min. 00.0°C Reset at Min. 00.0°C Wiedereinsch. 00.0°C

ALL_72 ALL_72 ALL_72

Superata Soglia Well Water Outlet 3 WasserAus Untergrenz
Bassa Temp.Acqua Low Temp.Threshold ueberschritten
Uscita Perd.3:Ripr. Overcome: Manual Brunnen 3 Aus: man.
Manual.a Min. 00.0°C Reset at Min. 00.0°C Wiedereinsch. 00.0°C

ALL_73 ALL_73 ALL_73

Superata Soglia Well Water Outlet 4 WasserAus Untergrenz
Bassa Temp.Acqua Low Temp.Threshold ueberschritten
Uscita Perd.4:Ripr. Overcome: Manual Brunnen 4 Aus: man.
Manual.a Min. 00.0°C Reset at Min. 00.0°C Wiedereinsch. 00.0°C

This group of alarm templates appears when the temperature of the relative circuit heat exchanger outgoing water is
below the antifreeze value 2 set in the Service branch.
The alarms causes the shutdown of the relative hydraulic circuit compressors. The alarm can be reset manually
when the water temperature exceeds the tripping value plus the differential.

ALL_74 ALL_74 ALL_74

Superata Soglia User water outlet 1 Hochtemperatur
Alta Temperatura High temperature ueberschritten
Acqua Uscita threshold 0vercome Wasser Austritt
Utilizzo 1 Verbraucher 1

ALL_75 ALL_75 ALL_75

Superata Soglia User water outlet 2 Hochtemperatur
Alta Temperatura High temperature ueberschritten
Acqua Uscita threshold 0vercome Wasser Austritt
Utilizzo 2 Verbraucher 2

ALL_76 ALL_76 ALL_76

Superata Soglia User water outlet 3 Hochtemperatur
Alta Temperatura High temperature ueberschritten
Acqua Uscita threshold 0vercome Wasser Austritt
Utilizzo 3 Verbraucher 3

ALL_77 ALL_77 ALL_77

Superata Soglia User water outlet 4 Hochtemperatur
Alta Temperatura High temperature ueberschritten
Acqua Uscita threshold 0vercome Wasser Austritt
Utilizzo 4 Verbraucher 4

This group of alarms appears when the temperature of user hydraulic circuit outgoing water is higher than the
maximum operating limit, when the unit is running in heating mode.
The alarm causes the shutdown of the relative hydraulic circuit compressors, while the pumps keep running. The
alarm can be reset manually when the outlet temperature drops below the tripping value minus the differential.

ALL_78 ALL_78 ALL_78

Allarme Sonda Temp. Reference water Betriebstemperatur
Acqua Riferimento probe alarm Fuehler defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

135
ALL_79 ALL_79 ALL_79
Allarme Sonda Temp. User water outlet Frostschutzfuehler 1
Acqua Uscita Util.1 probe 1 alarm defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

ALL_80 ALL_80 ALL_80

Allarme Sonda Temp. User water outlet Frostschutzfuehler 2
Acqua Uscita Util.2 probe 2 alarm defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

ALL_81 ALL_81 ALL_81

Allarme Sonda Temp. User water outlet Frostschutzfuehler 3
Acqua Uscita Util.3 probe 3 alarm defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

ALL_82 ALL_82 ALL_82

Allarme Sonda Temp. User water outlet Frostschutzfuehler 4
Acqua Uscita Util.4 probe 4 alarm defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

ALL_83 ALL_83 ALL_83

Allarme Sonda Temp. Well water outlet WasserAusfuehler 1
Acqua Uscita Perd.1 probe 1 alarm defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

ALL_84 ALL_84 ALL_84

Allarme Sonda Temp. Well water outlet WasserAusfuehler 2
Acqua Uscita Perd.2 probe 2 alarm defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

ALL_85 ALL_85 ALL_85

Allarme Sonda Temp. Well water outlet WasserAusfuehler 3
Acqua Uscita Perd.3 probe 3 alarm defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

ALL_86 ALL_86 ALL_86

Allarme Sonda Temp. Well water outlet WasserAusfuehler 4
Acqua Uscita Perd.4 probe 4 alarm defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

ALL_87 ALL_87 ALL_87

Allarme Sonda Alta High pressure probe Hochdruckfuehler
Pressione Circuito 1 circuit 1 alarm Kreis 1
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not defekt oder
Connessa connected nicht verbunden

ALL_88 ALL_88 ALL_88

Allarme Sonda Alta High pressure probe Hochdruckfuehler
Pressione Circuito 2 circuit 2 alarm Kreis 2
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not defekt oder
Connessa connected nicht verbunden

ALL_89 ALL_89 ALL_89

Allarme Sonda Alta High pressure probe Hochdruckfuehler
Pressione Circuito 3 circuit 3 alarm Kreis 3
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not defekt oder
Connessa connected nicht verbunden

136
ALL_90 ALL_90 ALL_90
Allarme Sonda Alta High pressure probe Hochdruckfuehler
Pressione Circuito 4 circuit 4 alarm Kreis 4
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not defekt oder
Connessa connected nicht verbunden

ALL_91 ALL_91 ALL_91

Allarme Sonda Bassa Low pressure probe Niederdruckfuehler
Pressione Circuito 1 circuit 1 alarm Kreis 1
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not defekt oder
Connessa connected nicht verbunden

ALL_92 ALL_92 ALL_92

Allarme Sonda Bassa Low pressure probe Niederdruckfuehler
Pressione Circuito 2 circuit 2 alarm Kreis 2
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not defekt oder
Connessa connected nicht verbunden

ALL_93 ALL_93 ALL_93

Allarme Sonda Bassa Low pressure probe Niederdruckfuehler
Pressione Circuito 3 circuit 3 alarm Kreis 3
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not defekt oder
Connessa connected nicht verbunden

ALL_94 ALL_94 ALL_94

Allarme Sonda Bassa Low pressure probe Niederdruckfuehler
Pressione Circuito 4 circuit 4 alarm Kreis 4
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not defekt oder
Connessa connected nicht verbunden

ALL_95 ALL_95 ALL_95

Allarme Sonda Coil temperature Temperature Register
Batteria 1 probe 1 alarm Fuehler 1
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not defekt oder
Connessa connected nicht verbunden

ALL_96 ALL_96 ALL_96

Allarme Sonda Coil temperature Temperature Register
Batteria 2 probe 2 alarm Fuehler 2
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not defekt oder
Connessa connected nicht verbunden

ALL_97 ALL_97 ALL_97

Allarme Sonda Coil temperature Temperature Register
Batteria 3 probe 3 alarm Fuehler 3
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not defekt oder
Connessa connected nicht verbunden

ALL_98 ALL_98 ALL_98

Allarme Sonda Coil temperature Temperature Register
Batteria 4 probe 4 alarm Fuehler 4
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not defekt oder
Connessa connected nicht verbunden

ALL_99 ALL_99 ALL_99

Allarme Sonda Ambient temperature Aussenluftfuehler
Temperatura Aria probe alarm defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

ALL_100 ALL_100 ALL_100

Allarme Sonda Return temperature Wasser Eintritt-
Temp. Acqua Ritorno probe alarm Fuehler defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

137
ALL_101 ALL_101 ALL_101
Allarme Sonda Recovery temperature WRG Fuehler
Temp.Acqua Recupero probe alarm defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

ALL_102 ALL_102 ALL_102

Allarme Segnale Set point variable Variable Sollwert
Set Point Variable alarm Alarm
Errato o Value out of limits Falsche wert
Fuori dai limite

ALL_103 ALL_103 ALL_103

Allarme Sonda Transformer probe Trafo alarm
Trasf.Amperom. alarm defekt oder
Guasta o non Probe faulty or not nicht verbunden
Connessa connected

This group of alarm templates appears when the value read by the control on the analog inputs is beyond the
specified limits.
The control will stop: the entire unit if the alarm is related to the reference water temperature, the relative circuits if
related to the outgoing water various temperatures or the pressures or, in other cases, related to the connected
operating mode.
The alarm can only be cancelled and reset manually when the value read, which triggered the alarm, returns within
the limits set.

ALL_105 ALL_105 ALL_105

Allarme Fans free cooling Thermoschutzschalter
Termico Ventilatori protection 1 FK Ventilatoren 1
Free cooling alarm Alarm
Esterno 1

ALL_106 ALL_106 ALL_106

Allarme Fans free cooling Thermoschutzschalter
Termico Ventilatori protection 2 FK Ventilatoren 2
Free cooling alarm Alarm
Esterno 2

ALL_107 ALL_107 ALL_107

Allarme Fans free cooling Thermoschutzschalter
Termico Ventilatori protection 3 FK Ventilatoren 3
Free cooling alarm Alarm
Esterno 3

ALL_108 ALL_108 ALL_108

Allarme Fans free cooling Thermoschutzschalter
Termico Ventilatori protection 4 FK Ventilatoren 4
Free cooling alarm Alarm
Esterno 4

The alarm templates of this group are enabled when the digital input of the free cooling fan thermal breakers opens.
The alarm stops the relative fans and can be cancelled manually only when the input is closed.

ALL_110 ALL_110 ALL_110

Arresto Recupero Recovery off WRG Ausschaltung
per Superato High pressure nach Hochdrouck 1
Limite di circuit 1 limit
Pressione 1 overcome

138
ALL_111 ALL_111 ALL_111
Arresto Recupero Recovery off WRG Ausschaltung
per Superato High pressure nach Hochdrouck 2
Limite di circuit 2 limit
Pressione 2 overcome

ALL_112 ALL_112 ALL_112

Arresto Recupero Recovery off WRG Ausschaltung
per Superato High pressure nach Hochdrouck 3
Limite di circuit 3 limit
Pressione 3 overcome

ALL_113 ALL_113 ALL_113

Arresto Recupero Recovery off WRG Ausschaltung
per Superato High pressure nach Hochdrouck 4
Limite di circuit 4 limit
Pressione 4 overcome

These alarm templates appear when the control interrupts the heat recovery on the relative cooling circuits to reach
the pressure limit.
After the condensation pressure has decreased, the alarm can be cancelled automatically or manually and the
recovery restored, depending on the factory settings.

ALL_115 ALL_115 ALL_115

Allarme Free cooling pump Thermoschutz alarm
termico pompa thermal overload Freie Kuehlung Pumpe
free cooling alarm

This alarm template, which appears when the relative digital input is open, causes the shutdown of the free cooling
pump.
The alarm can only be cancelled manually after the relative digital input has closed.

ALL_116 ALL_116 ALL_116

Allarme Free cooling Freie Kuehlung
Flussostato flow switch Stroemungsaechter
free cooling alarm alarm

This alarm template, that appears after a delay caused by the opening of the relative digital input, stops the free
cooling pump operation.
The alarm can only be cancelled manually.

ALL_117 ALL_117 ALL_117

Segnalazione Warning Achtung
Manutenzione pompa Free cooling pump Wartung Pumpe
free cooling needs maintenance Freie Kuehlung

This template appears when the free cooling pump operating hours have exceeded the value set for maintenance.
The alarm is for signalling only and does not interrupt the pump operation. It can only be cancelled from the
maintenance branch.

ALL_130 ALL_130 ALL_130

Driver1 Driver1 Driver1
Allarme MOP MOP alarm MOP alarm

139
ALL_131 ALL_131 ALL_131
Driver2 Driver2 Driver2

Allarme MOP MOP alarm MOP alarm

ALL_132 ALL_132 ALL_132

Driver3 Driver3 Driver3

Allarme MOP MOP alarm MOP alarm

ALL_133 ALL_133 ALL_133

Driver4 Driver4 Driver4

Allarme MOP MOP alarm MOP alarm

ALL_134 ALL_134 ALL_134

Driver5 Driver5 Driver5

Allarme MOP MOP alarm MOP alarm

ALL_135 ALL_135 ALL_135

Driver6 Driver6 Driver6

Allarme MOP MOP alarm MOP alarm

ALL_136 ALL_136 ALL_136

Driver7 Driver7 Driver7

Allarme MOP MOP alarm MOP alarm

ALL_137 ALL_137 ALL_137

Driver8 Driver8 Driver8

Allarme MOP MOP alarm MOP alarm

This group of templates signals that the MOP breaker tripping limit, set in the relative drivers, has been reached.

ALL_138 ALL_138 ALL_138

Allarme Off line Off line alarm Off line alarm
Driver: Driver: Driver:

This template appears when the control does not find one or more drivers which should have been present.
In the third line of this template will be shown which driver is missing.
After the alarm signal, the control stops or prevents the start-up of the cooling circuit controlled by the missing
driver.
The alarm can only be reset manually after the correct communication between the control and the driver has been
restored.

140
ALL_139 ALL_139 ALL_139
Valvola non chiusa No close valve Ungeshloss.Ventil
durante power OFF during power off Power off lag
Driver: Driver: Driver:

This template appears when the expansion valve remains open due to lack of power supply.
In the last line you can see the valve in question.

ALL_140 ALL_140 ALL_140

Alta temperatura High evaporation Hochtemperatur
aspirazione temperature Absaugen
Driver: Driver: Driver:

This template appears when the temperature read by one of the drivers on the suction line refrigerator exceeds the
set limit.
In the last line will appear which driver has detected the limit exceeded.
The alarm can only be cancelled manually.

ALL_143 ALL_143 ALL_143

Segnalazione Warning Meldung
Bassa Differenza Low Difference Nieder Unterschied
di Pressione HP-LP Between HP-LP Druck HP-LP

The alarm is signalled during operation when the pressure difference in one of the active cooling circuits is below the
minimum value set.
This signal does not cause any arrest.

ALL_MSK ALL_MSK ALL_MSK

Chiamare il centro Call Service point Rufen Sie an dem
Assistenza Servicetermin
BLUE SERVICE

This template appears when the cancellation is blocked by at least one manual reset alarm after the number of
cancellations per a certain period of time has been reached.
The alarm can only be reset by accessing the loop of "alarms" templates protected by password.

141
142
10380350002
Issue 08/10 repl.06/09